PowerXL DG1 Application Manual

PowerXL DG1 Series VFD
Application Manual
Effective April 2015
Supersedes March 2014
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Liability

The information, recommendations, descriptions, and safety notations in this document are
based on Eaton’s experience and judgment and may not cover all contingencies. If further
information is required, an Eaton sales office should be consulted. Sale of the product shown
in this literature is subject to the terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Eaton selling
policies or other contractual agreement between Eaton and the purchaser.
THERE ARE NO UNDERSTANDINGS, AGREEMENTS, WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
MERCHANTABILITY, OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICALLY SET OUT IN ANY EXISTING
CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES. ANY SUCH CONTRACT STATES THE ENTIRE
OBLIGATION OF EATON. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BECOME
PART OF OR MODIFY ANY CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES.
In no event will Eaton be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including
negligence), strict liability, or otherwise for any special, indirect, incidental, or consequential
damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment,
plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of
existing power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting
from the use of the information, recommendations, and descriptions contained herein. The
information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Cover Photo: Eaton PowerXL® DG1 Series Drives
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com i

Support Services
Support Services
The goal of Eaton is to ensure your greatest possible satisfaction with the operation of our
products. We are dedicated to providing fast, friendly, and accurate assistance. That is why
we offer you so many ways to get the support you need. Whether it is by phone, fax, or
email, you can access Eaton’s support information 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
Our wide range of services is listed below.
You should contact your local distributor for product pricing, availability, ordering, expediting,
and repairs.
Website
Use the Eaton Website to find product information. You can also find information on local
distributors or Eaton’s sales offices.
Website Address
www.eaton.com/drives
EatonCare Customer Support Center

Call the EatonCare Support Center if you need assistance with placing an order, stock
availability or proof of shipment, expediting an existing order, emergency shipments, product
price information, returns other than warranty returns, and information on local distributors or
sales offices.
Voice: 877-ETN-CARE (386-2273) (8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m. EST)
After-Hours Emergency: 800-543-7038 (6:00 p.m.–8:00 a.m. EST)
Drives Technical Resource Center

Voice: 877-ETN-CARE (386-2273) option 2, option 6
(8:00 a.m.–5:00 p.m. Central Time U.S. [UTC –6])
email: TRCDrives@Eaton.com
For Customers in Europe, Contact

Phone: +49 (0) 228 6 02-3640
Hotline: +49 (0) 180 5 223822
email: AfterSalesEGBonn@Eaton.com
www.eaton.com/moeller/aftersales
ii PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

Table of Contents
SAFETY
Before Commencing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Definitions and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Hazardous High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
CHAPTER 1—POWERXL DG1 SERIES OVERVIEW

How to Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Receiving and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Real Time Clock Battery Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Carton Labels (U.S. and Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Catalog Number System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Power Ratings and Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CHAPTER 2—KEYPAD OVERVIEW

Keypad Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
LED Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CHAPTER 3—MENU OVERVIEW

Main Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CHAPTER 4—STARTUP
Startup Wizard Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Application Macro Mini-Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
CHAPTER 5—STANDARD APPLICATION

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Control I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Standard Application—Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CHAPTER 6—MULTI-PUMP AND FAN CONTROL APPLICATION

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Control Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Pump and Fan Application—Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
CHAPTER 7—MULTI-PID APPLICATION

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Multi-PID Application—Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com iii
Table of Contents, continued

CHAPTER 8—MULTI-PURPOSE APPLICATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Multi-Purpose Application—Parameters List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
APPENDIX A—DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

Description of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
APPENDIX B—FAULTS AND WARNING CODES

Fault Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
iv PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

List of Figures
Figure 1. RTC Battery Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Figure 2. Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Figure 3. Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Figure 4. Keypad and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 5. General View of LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 6. Welcome Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 7. Upgrade Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 8. Auto Backup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 9. Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 10. Parent Node Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 11. Parameter Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 12. Parameter Page from Favorite Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 13. Fault Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Figure 14. Main Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 15. Main Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 16. M—Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 17. Active Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 18. Pop-Up Active Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 19. Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 20. Parameter Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 21. Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 22. Down From Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 23. Parameters Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 24. Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 25. Edit Parameter Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 26. Parameter Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 27. Example of Two-Pump Autochange, Main Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 28. Two-Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 29. Example of Three-Pump Autochange, Main Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 30. Three-Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 31. Example of the Function of the PFC Application
with Three Auxiliary Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 32. Multi Pump Control Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 33. Multi-Drive \ Multi-Pump Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 34. PowerXL Drives with 10 V Supply with a 0–10 V Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 35. PowerXL Drives with 10 V Supply with a 4–20 mA Transducer . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 36. PowerXL Drives with Ext Supply with a 4–20 mA Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 37. Bandwidth Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 38. PID Controller Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 39. Acceleration and Deceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 40. Motor Parameters from Ratings Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 41. Analog Input AI Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 42. AI1 Signal Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 43. AI1 No Signal Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 44. AI1 Signal Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 45. Example of Joystick Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 46. Example of Sleep Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 47. With and Without Reference Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 48. Start Forward / Start Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 49. Start, Stop and Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com v

List of Figures, continued

Figure 50. Start Pulse / Stop Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 51. Activation of Fixed Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 52. Analog Output Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 53. Analog Output Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 54. Analog Output Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 55. Supervision Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 56. External Brake Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 57. Acceleration/Deceleration (S-shaped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 58. Example of Skip Frequency Area Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 59. Ramp Speed Scaling between Skip Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 60. Linear and Squared Change of Motor Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 61. Programmable V/Hz Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 62. Motor Thermal Current IT Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 63. Motor Temperature Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 64. Stall Characteristics Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 65. Stall Time Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 66. Setting of Minimum Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 67. Underload Time Counter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 68. Example of Automatic Restarts with Two Restarts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 69. Setting up PID Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Figure 70. DC-Braking Time when Stop Mode = Coasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 71. DC-Braking Time when Stop Mode = Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
vi PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

List of Tables
Table 1. Common Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table 2. Type 1/IP21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Table 3. Type 12/IP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Table 4. Type 1/IP21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table 5. Type 12/IP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table 6. Type 1/IP21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table 7. Type 12/IP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table 8. Keypad Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Table 9. LED State Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Table 10. Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table 11. Keypad Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 12. Startup Wizard Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 13. Multi-Pump and Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Table 14. PID Mini-Wizard Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Table 15. I/O Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 16. Drive Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table 17. Monitor—M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 18. Operate Mode—O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Table 19. Basic Parameters—P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Table 20. Analog Input—P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 21. Digital Input—P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 22. Analog Output—P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 23. Digital Output—P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 24. Drive Control—P7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 25. Motor Control—P8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 26. Protections—P9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 27. Preset Speed—P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 28. Brake—P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 29. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 30. Modbus RTU—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 31. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 32. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 33. SmartWire-DT—P20.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 34. Basic Setting—P21.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 35. Version Info—P21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 36. Application Info—P21.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 37. User Info—P21.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 38. Multi-Pump and Fan Application Default I/O Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Table 40. Monitor—M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Table 41. Operate Mode—O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 44. Digital Input—P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Table 45. Analog Output—P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com vii
List of Tables, continued

Table 50. PID Controller 1—P10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 51. Preset Speed—P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 52. Brake—P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 53. Fire Mode—P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 54. Second Motor Parameter—P16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 55. Bypass—P17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 56. Multi-Pump Operation Mode—P18.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 57. Multi-Pump Status—P18.1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 58. Multi-Pump Network Status—P18.1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 59. Multi-Pump Latest Fault Code—P18.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 60. Multi-Pump Output Frequency—P18.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 61. Multi-Pump Motor Voltage—P18.2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 62. Multi-Pump Motor Current—P18.2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 63. Multi-Pump Motor Torque—P18.2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 64. Multi-Pump Motor Power—P18.2.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 65. Multi-Pump Motor Speed—P18.2.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 66. Multi-Pump Motor Run Time—P18.2.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 67. Multi-Pump Settings—P18.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Table 68. Real Time Clock—P19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Table 71. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 72. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 73. SmartWire-DT—P20.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table 74. Basic Setting—P21.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table 75. Version Info—P21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 76. Application Info—P21.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 77. User Info—P21.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 78. Multi-PID Application Default I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 80. Monitor—M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 81. Operate Mode—O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Table 84. Digital Input—P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Table 85. Analog Output—P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Table 92. Preset Speed—P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 93. Brake—P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 94. Fire Mode—P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 95. Second Motor Parameter—P16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 96. Bypass—P17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 97. Multi-Pump Operation Mode—P18.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Table 98. Multi-Pump Status—P18.1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Table 99. Multi-Pump Network Status—P18.1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
viii PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

Table 101. Multi-Pump Output Frequency—P18.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Table 102. Multi-Pump Motor Voltage—P18.2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Table 103. Multi-Pump Motor Current—P18.2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 104. Multi-Pump Motor Torque—P18.2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 105. Multi-Pump Motor Power—P18.2.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 106. Multi-Pump Motor Speed—P18.2.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 107. Multi-Pump Motor Run Time—P18.2.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 108. Multi-Pump Settings—P18.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 109. Real Time Clock—P19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 112. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 113. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 114. SmartWire DT—P20.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 115. Basic Setting—P21.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 116. Version Info—P21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 117. Application Info—P21.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Table 118. User Info—P21.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Table 119. Multi-Purpose Application Default I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Table 120. Drive Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Table 121. Monitor—M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Table 122. Operate Mode—O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 123. Basic Parameters—P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 124. Analog Input—P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 125. Digital Input—P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 126. Analog Output—P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 128. Logic Function—P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Table 129. Drive Control—P7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 130. Motor Control—P8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Table 132. PID Controller 1—P10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Table 133. PID Controller 2—P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 134. Preset Speed—P12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Table 135. Torque Control—P13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Table 136. Brake—P14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Table 137. Fire Mode—P15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Table 138. Second Motor Parameter—P16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Table 139. Bypass—P17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Table 140. Multi-Pump Operation Mode—P18.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Table 141. Multi-Pump Status—P18.1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 142. Multi-Pump Network Status—P18.1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Table 144. Multi-Pump Output Frequency—P18.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Table 145. Multi-Pump Motor Voltage—P18.2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Table 146. Multi-Pump Motor Current—P18.2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 147. Multi-Pump Motor Torque—P18.2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 148. Multi-Pump Motor Power—P18.2.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 149. Multi-Pump Motor Speed—P18.2.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com ix


Table 150. Multi-Pump Motor Run Time—P18.2.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 151. Multi-Pump Settings—P18.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Table 152. Real Time Clock—P19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Table 153. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Table 154. Modbus RTU—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Table 155. Modbus MS/TCP—P20.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Table 156. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Table 157. SmartWire DT—P20.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Table 158. Basic Setting—P21.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Table 159. Version Info—P21.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Table 160. Application Info—P21.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Table 161. User Info—P21.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Table 162. Active Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Table 163. History Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
x PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

Safety
Warning! ● Measures should be taken to ensure the proper restart of

Dangerous Electrical Voltage! programs interrupted after a voltage dip or failure. This
should not cause dangerous operating states even for a
short time. If necessary, emergency-stop devices should
Before Commencing the Installation be implemented
● Disconnect the power supply of the device ● Wherever faults in the automation system may cause
injury or material damage, external measures must be
● Ensure that devices cannot be accidentally restarted
implemented to ensure a safe operating state in the event
● Verify isolation from the supply of a fault or malfunction (for example, by means of
separate limit switches, mechanical interlocks, and so on)
● Earth and short circuit the device
● Depending on their degree of protection, adjustable
● Cover or enclose any adjacent live components frequency drives may contain live bright metal parts,
● Only suitably qualified personnel in accordance with EN moving or rotating components, or hot surfaces during and
50110-1/-2 (VDE 0105 Part 100) may work on this device/ immediately after operation
system ● Removal of the required covers, improper installation, or
● Before installation and before touching the device ensure incorrect operation of motor or adjustable frequency drive
that you are free of electrostatic charge may cause the failure of the device and may lead to
serious injury or damage
● The functional earth (FE, PES) must be connected to the
protective earth (PE) or the potential equalization. The ● The applicable national accident prevention and safety
system installer is responsible for implementing this regulations apply to all work carried out on live adjustable
connection frequency drives
● Connecting cables and signal lines should be installed so ● The electrical installation must be carried out in
that inductive or capacitive interference does not impair accordance with the relevant regulations (for example,
the automation functions with regard to cable cross sections, fuses, PE)
● Install automation devices and related operating elements ● Transport, installation, commissioning, and maintenance
in such a way that they are well protected against work must be carried out only by qualified personnel
unintentional operation (IEC 60364, HD 384 and national occupational safety
regulations)
● Suitable safety hardware and software measures should
be implemented for the I/O interface so that an open ● Installations containing adjustable frequency drives must
circuit on the signal side does not result in undefined be provided with additional monitoring and protective
states in the automation devices devices in accordance with the applicable safety
regulations. Modifications to the adjustable frequency
● Ensure a reliable electrical isolation of the extra-low drives using the operating software are permitted
voltage of the 24 V supply. Only use power supply units
complying with IEC 60364-4-41 (VDE 0100 Part 410) or ● All covers and doors must be kept closed during operation
HD384.4.41 S2 ● To reduce hazards for people or equipment, the user must
● Deviations of the input voltage from the rated value must include in the machine design measures that restrict the
not exceed the tolerance limits given in the specifications, consequences of a malfunction or failure of the drive
otherwise this may cause malfunction and dangerous (increased motor speed or sudden standstill of motor).
operation These measures include:
● Emergency stop devices complying with IEC/EN 60204-1 ● Other independent devices for monitoring safety-related
must be effective in all operating modes of the automation variables (speed, travel, end positions, and so on)
devices. Unlatching the emergency-stop devices must not ● Electrical or non-electrical system-wide measures
cause a restart (electrical or mechanical interlocks)
● Devices that are designed for mounting in housings or ● Never touch live parts or cable connections of the
control cabinets must only be operated and controlled after adjustable frequency drive after it has been
they have been installed and with the housing closed. disconnected from the power supply. Due to the charge
Desktop or portable units must only be operated and in the capacitors, these parts may still be live after
controlled in enclosed housings disconnection. Fit appropriate warning signs
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com xi

Definitions and Symbols Warnings and Cautions

This manual contains clearly marked cautions and warnings
WARNING which are intended for your personal safety and to avoid any
This symbol indicates high voltage. It calls your attention unintentional damage to the product or connected
to items or operations that could be dangerous to you appliances. Please read the information included in cautions
and other persons operating this equipment. Read the and warnings carefully.
message and follow the instructions carefully. This
symbol is the “Safety Alert Symbol”. It occurs with either WARNING
of two signal words: CAUTION or WARNING, as
described below. The relay outputs and other I/O-terminals may have a
dangerous control voltage present even when PowerXL
DG1 is disconnected from mains.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not WARNING
avoided, can result in serious injury or death.
Be sure not to plug the Ethernet/BACnet/IP cable to the
terminal under the keypad! This might harm your
CAUTION personal computer.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, can result in minor to moderate injury, or serious WARNING
damage to the product. The situation described in the
CAUTION may, if not avoided, lead to serious results. Be sure not to plug the Modbus TCP cable to the terminal
Important safety measures are described in CAUTION (as under the keypad! This might harm your personal
well as WARNING). computer.
CAUTION
Hazardous High Voltage Remove external control signal before resetting the fault to
prevent unintentional restart of the drive.
WARNING
Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are
connected to hazardous line voltages. When servicing
drives and electronic controllers, there may be exposed
components with housings or protrusions at or above
line potential. Extreme care should be taken to protect
against shock.
Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only
one hand when checking components. Always work with
another person in case an emergency occurs. Disconnect
power before checking controllers or performing
maintenance. Be sure equipment is properly grounded. Wear
safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or
rotating machinery.
xii PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com
Important Safety Information Important Warnings
WARNING
Hazardous High Voltage
PowerXL DG1 AC drive is meant for fixed installations
only.
WARNING
The components of the power unit of PowerXL DG1 are WARNING
live when the AC drive is connected to mains potential.
Coming into contact with this voltage is extremely Do not perform any measurements when the AC drive is
dangerous and may cause death or severe injury. connected to the mains.
WARNING WARNING
The motor terminals U, V, W and the brake resistor The ground leakage current of PowerXL DG1 AC drives
terminals are live when PowerXL DG1 is connected to exceeds 3.5 mA AC. According to standard EN61800-5-1,
mains, even if the motor is not running. a reinforced protective ground connection must be
ensured.
WARNING
WARNING
After disconnecting the AC drive from the mains, wait
until the indicators on the keypad go out (if no keypad is If the AC drive is used as a part of a machine, the machine
attached see the indicators on the cover). Wait 5 more manufacturer is responsible for providing the machine
minutes before doing any work on the connections of with a supply disconnecting device (EN 60204-1).
PowerXL DG1. Do not open the cover before this time
has expired. After expiration of this time, use a WARNING
measuring equipment to absolutely ensure that no
voltage is present. Always ensure absence of voltage Only spare parts delivered by Eaton can be used.
before starting any electrical work!
WARNING
WARNING At power-up, power brake or fault reset the motor will
The control I/O-terminals are isolated from the mains start immediately if the start signal is active, unless the
potential. However, the relay outputs and other I/O- pulse control for Start/Stop logic has been selected.
terminals may have a dangerous control voltage present Furthermore, the I/O functionalistic (including start
even when PowerXL DG1 is disconnected from mains. inputs) may change if parameters, applications or
software are changed. Disconnect, therefore, the motor if
an unexpected start can cause danger.
WARNING
Before connecting the AC drive to mains, confirm that WARNING
the front and cable covers of PowerXL DG1 are closed.
The motor starts automatically after automatic fault
reset if the auto restart function is activated. See the
WARNING Application Manual for more detailed information.
During a ramp stop (see the Application Manual), the
motor is still generating voltage to the drive. Therefore, WARNING
do not touch the components of the AC drive before the
motor has completely stopped. Wait until the indicators Prior to measurements on the motor or the motor cable,
on the keypad go out (if no keypad is attached see the disconnect the motor cable from the AC drive.
indicators on the cover). Wait additional 5 minutes
before starting any work on the drive. WARNING
Do not touch the components on the circuit boards.
Static voltage discharge may damage the components.
WARNING
Check that the EMC level of the AC drive corresponds to
the requirements of your supply network.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com xiii
Additional Cautions
CAUTION
The PowerXL DG1 AC drive must always be grounded with
an grounding conductor connected to the grounding terminal
marked with. The ground leakage current of PowerXL DG1
exceeds 3.5 mA AC. According to EN61800-5-1, one or more
of the following conditions for the associated protective
circuit shall be satisfied:
a) The protective conductor shall have a cross-sectional
area of at least 10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al, through its
total run.
b) Where the protective conductor has a cross-sectional
area of less than 10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al, a second
protective conductor of at least the same cross-sectional
area shall be provided up to a point where the protective
conductor has a cross-sectional area not less than
10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al.
c) Automatic disconnection of the supply in case of loss of
continuity of the protective conductor. The cross-
sectional area of every protective grounding conductor
that does not form part of the supply cable or cable
enclosure shall, in any case, be not less than:
— 2.5 mm2 if mechanical protection is provided or
— 4 mm2 if mechanical protection is not provided.
The ground fault protection inside the AC drive protects
only the drive itself against ground faults in the motor or
the motor cable. It is not intended for personal safety.
The ground fault protection inside the AC drive protects
only the drive itself against ground faults in the motor or
the motor cable. It is not intended for personal safety.
Due to the high capacitive currents present in the AC
drive, fault current protective switches may not function
properly.
Do not perform any voltage withstand tests on any part
of PowerXL DG1. There is a certain procedure according
to which the tests shall be performed. Ignoring this
procedure may result in damaged product.
xiv PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com
DG1 Series VFD
Sécurité
Avertissement ! ● Les dispositifs conçus pour un montage dans des boîtiers
Tension électrique dangereuse ! ou armoires de commande ne doivent être utilisés et
contrôlés qu'après avoir été installés et avec le boîtier
fermé. Les unités de bureau ou portatives ne doivent être
utilisées et contrôlées que dans leurs boîtiers fermés.
Avant de commencer l'installation ● Des mesures doivent être prises pour assurer un bon
● Débrancher l'alimentation de l'appareil. redémarrage des programmes interrompus après une
● S'assurer que les dispositifs ne peuvent pas être chute ou une panne de tension. Ceci ne doit pas causer
accidentellement redémarrés. des états de fonctionnement dangereux, même pour un
court laps de temps. Si nécessaire, des dispositifs d'arrêt
● Vérifier l'isolement de l'alimentation. d'urgence doivent être utilisés.
● Mettre l'appareil à la terre et le protéger contre les ● Quand des défaillances du système d'automatisation
courts-circuits. peuvent entraîner des blessures ou des dommages
matériels, des mesures externes doivent être appliquées
● Couvrir ou enfermer tout composant sous tension
pour assurer un état de fonctionnement sans danger en
adjacent.
cas de panne ou de mauvais fonctionnement (par exemple
● Seul le personnel qualifié conformément à la norme EN au moyen de disjoncteurs séparés, de verrouillages
50110-1/-2 (VDE 0105 Partie 100) peut travailler sur cet mécaniques, etc.).
appareil/ce système. ● En fonction de leur degré de protection, les entraînements
● Avant l'installation et avant de toucher l'appareil, s'assurer à fréquence variable peuvent contenir des pièces
de ne porter aucune charge électrostatique. métalliques sous tension, des composants rotatifs ou en
mouvement et des surfaces brûlantes, pendant le
● La terre fonctionnelle (FE, PSE) doit être raccordée à la fonctionnement et immédiatement après l'arrêt.
terre de protection (PE) ou la compensation de potentiel.
L'installateur du système a la responsabilité d'assurer ● Le retrait des protections requises, une installation
cette connexion. incorrecte ou un mauvais fonctionnement du moteur ou de
l'entraînement à fréquence variable peuvent causer la
● Les câbles de connexion et les lignes de signal doivent défaillance de l'appareil et entraîner des blessures graves
être installés de façon à ce que les interférences et des dommages importants.
capacitives ou inductives ne compromettent pas les
fonctions d'automatisation. ● La réglementation nationale applicable en matière de
sécurité et de prévention des accidents s'applique à tous
● Installer les appareils d'automatisation et les éléments de les travaux effectués sur les entraînements à fréquence
fonctionnement associés de manière à ce qu'ils soient variable sous tension.
bien protégés contre tout fonctionnement accidentel.
● L'installation électrique doit être effectuée conformément
● Des dispositifs de sécurité matériels et logiciels appropriés aux réglementations applicables (par exemple, en ce qui
doivent être utilisés en rapport avec l'interface des E/S afin concerne les sections transversales des câbles, les
qu'un circuit ouvert sur le côté signal ne résulte pas en fusibles, la mise à la terre de protection).
états indéfinis dans les dispositifs d'automatisation.
● Le transport, l'installation, la mise en service et les travaux
● Assurer une isolation électrique fiable sur le côté tension de maintenance doivent être effectués uniquement par un
extra basse de l'alimentation 24 V. Utiliser uniquement des personnel qualifié (IEC 60364, HD 384 et règles de
blocs d'alimentation conformes à la norme CEI 60364-4-41 sécurité du travail).
(VDE 0100, partie 410) ou HD384.4.41 S2.
● Les installations contenant des entraînements à fréquence
● Les écarts entre la tension d'entrée et la tension nominale variable doivent être équipées de dispositifs de
ne doivent pas dépasser les limites de tolérance indiquées surveillance et de protection, conformément aux
dans les spécifications, au risque de provoquer un mauvais réglementations applicables en matière de sécurité. Les
fonctionnement et une utilisation dangereuse du système. modifications des entraînements à fréquence variable
● Les dispositifs d'arrêt d'urgence conformes à la norme réalisées à l'aide du logiciel d'exploitation sont autorisées.
CEI/EN 60204-1 doivent être efficace dans tous les modes ● Toutes les protections et les portes doivent être
de fonctionnement des dispositifs d'automatisation. Le maintenues fermées pendant le fonctionnement.
déverrouillage des dispositifs d'arrêt d'urgence ne doit pas
entraîner un redémarrage.
DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com xv

DG1 Series VFD
● Pour réduire les risques d’accidents et de dommages Haute tension dangereuse

matériels, l'utilisateur doit inclure dans la conception de la
machine des mesures limitant les conséquences de panne AVERTISSEMENT
ou de mauvais fonctionnement de l'entraînement
(augmentation de la vitesse ou arrêt soudain du moteur). L'équipement de contrôle du moteur et les contrôleurs
Ces mesures comprennent : électroniques sont branchés sur des tensions secteur
dangereuses. Lors de l'entretien des entraînements et
● Autres dispositifs indépendants de surveillance des des contrôleurs électroniques, il peut y avoir des
variables en rapport avec la sécurité (vitesse, voyages, composants exposés avec des boîtiers ou des
positions d'extrémité, etc.) protubérances au niveau du potentiel du réseau ou
● Mesures électriques ou non électriques appliquées à au-dessus. Toutes les précautions doivent être prises
l'ensemble du système (verrouillages électriques ou pour se protéger contre les chocs électriques.
mécaniques) ● Se tenir sur un tapis isolant et prendre l'habitude de
● Ne jamais toucher les pièces sous tension ni les n'utiliser qu'une seule main pour vérifier les
connexions des câbles de l'entraînement à fréquence composants.
variable après leur déconnexion de l'alimentation. En ● Toujours travailler avec une autre personne lorsqu'une
raison de la charge dans les condensateurs, ces pièces situation d'urgence se produit.
peuvent être encore sous tension après la déconnexion.
Installer les panneaux d'avertissement appropriés. ● Débrancher l'alimentation avant de vérifier les
contrôleurs ou d'effectuer des travaux d'entretien.
Lire ce manuel en entier et s'assurer de bien comprendre les
procédures avant de tenter d'installer, de configurer, ● S'assurer que l'équipement est correctement relié à la
d'utiliser et d'effectuer tout travail d'entretien sur cet terre.
entraînement à fréquence variable DG1.
● Porter des lunettes de sécurité lors des travaux sur les
contrôleurs électroniques ou les machines rotatives.
Définitions et symboles
AVERTISSEMENT
Ce symbole indique une haute tension. Il attire
AVERTISSEMENT
l'attention sur les éléments ou les opérations qui Les composants de la section d'alimentation de
pourraient être dangereux pour les personnes utilisant l'entraînement restent sous tension après la coupure de
cet équipement. Lire attentivement le message et suivre la tension d'alimentation. Après la déconnexion de
attentivement les instructions. l'alimentation, attendre au moins cinq minutes avant de
retirer le couvercle pour permettre la décharge des
condensateurs du circuit intermédiaire.
Ce symbole est le « symbole d'alerte de sécurité ». Il Prêter attention aux avertissements signalant des
accompagne les deux termes d'avertissement suivants : dangers !
MISE EN GARDE ou AVERTISSEMENT, comme décrit
ci-dessous.
AVERTISSEMENT
Indique une situation potentiellement dangereuse qui, si DANGER
elle n'est pas évitée, peut entraîner des blessures graves 5 MIN
ou la mort.
AVERTISSEMENT
MISE EN GARDE Risque de choc électrique - risque de blessures ! Effectuer
Indique une situation potentiellement dangereuse qui, si elle le câblage uniquement si l'unité n'est plus sous tension.
n'est pas évitée, peut entraîner des blessures légères à
modérées et d'importants dégâts matériels. La situation AVERTISSEMENT
décrite dans la MISE EN GARDE peut, si elle n'est pas
évitée, entraîner des conséquences graves. Des mesures de Ne pas effectuer de modifications sur l'entraînement CA
sécurité importantes sont décrites dans les MISES EN lorsqu'il est connecté à l'alimentation secteur.
GARDE (ainsi que dans les AVERTISSEMENTS).
xvi DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

DG1 Series VFD
Avertissements et mises en garde

AVERTISSEMENT
AVERTISSEMENT Avant de mettre l'entraînement sous tension, s'assurer
que les protections avant et des câbles sont fermées et
S'assurer de mettre l'appareil à la terre en suivant les attachées pour empêcher l'exposition à d'éventuelles
instructions de ce manuel. Les unités non mises à la terre défaillances électriques. Le non-respect de cette
peuvent causer des chocs électriques et des incendies. précaution peut entraîner la mort ou des blessures
graves.
AVERTISSEMENT
Cet équipement ne doit être installé, réglé et entretenu AVERTISSEMENT
que par un personnel d'entretien électrique qualifié Un dispositif de protection/déconnexion en amont doit
connaissant la construction et le fonctionnement de ce être fourni, tel que requis par le code électrique national
type d'équipement, ainsi que les risques encourus. Le (NEC®). Le non-respect de cette précaution peut
non-respect de cette précaution peut entraîner la mort entraîner la mort ou des blessures graves.
ou des blessures graves.
AVERTISSEMENT
AVERTISSEMENT
Cet entraînement peut causer un courant CC dans le
Les composants à l'intérieur de l'entraînement sont sous conducteur de mise à la terre de protection. Lorsqu'un
tension lorsque l'entraînement est branché à dispositif de protection ou de surveillance à courant
l'alimentation. Le contact avec cette tension est résiduel est utilisé pour la protection en cas de contact
extrêmement dangereux et peut causer la mort ou des direct ou indirect, seul un dispositif de type B est
blessures graves. autorisé sur le côté alimentation de ce produit.
AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT
Les bornes de phase (L1, L2, L3), les bornes du moteur Ne travailler sur le câblage qu'après que l'entraînement a
(U, V, W) et les bornes de résistance de liaison CC/frein été correctement monté et attaché.
(DC-, DC+ /R+, R-) sont sous tension lorsque
l'entraînement est branché à l'alimentation, même si le
moteur ne tourne pas. Le contact avec cette tension est AVERTISSEMENT
extrêmement dangereux et peut causer la mort ou des Avant d'ouvrir les couvercles de l'entraînement :
blessures graves.
● Débrancher toute l'alimentation allant à l'entraîne-
AVERTISSEMENT ment, y compris l'alimentation de commande externe
pouvant être présente.
Même si les bornes E/S de commande sont isolées de la
tension secteur, les sorties de relais et les autres bornes
● Attendre un minimum de cinq minutes après
E/S peuvent présenter une tension dangereuse même l’extinction de tous les voyants du clavier. Cela permet
lorsque l'entraînement est débranché. Le contact avec aux condensateurs de bus CC de se décharger.
cette tension est extrêmement dangereux et peut causer ● Une tension dangereuse peut rester dans les
la mort ou des blessures graves. condensateurs de bus CC même si l'alimentation a été
coupée. Confirmer que les condensateurs sont
AVERTISSEMENT entièrement déchargés en mesurant la tension à l'aide
d'un multimètre réglé pour mesurer la tension CC.
Cet équipement a un grand courant de fuite capacitif
pendant le fonctionnement, ce qui peut mettre les pièces Le non-respect de cette précaution peut entraîner la mort
du boîtier à un niveau supérieur au potentiel de terre. ou des blessures graves.
Une mise à la terre appropriée, telle que décrite dans ce
manuel, est nécessaire. Le non-respect de cette AVERTISSEMENT
précaution peut entraîner la mort ou des blessures
graves. L'ouverture du dispositif de protection du circuit de
dérivation peut indiquer que le courant de défaut a été
interrompu. Pour réduire le risque d'incendie ou de choc
électrique, les pièces porteuses de courant et les autres
composants du contrôleur doivent être examinés et
remplacés s'ils sont endommagés. Si l'élément de
courant d'un relais de surcharge a grillé, le relais de
surcharge doit être intégralement remplacé.
DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com xvii

DG1 Series VFD
AVERTISSEMENT MISE EN GARDE

Le fonctionnement de cet équipement nécessite le Installer cet entraînement sur une surface perpendiculaire
respect des instructions d'installation et de capable de supporter le poids de l'entraînement et non
fonctionnement détaillées fournies dans le manuel soumise à des vibrations afin de diminuer les risques de
d'installation/de fonctionnement destiné à être utilisé chute et de dommage de l'entraînement, ainsi que les
avec ce produit. Ces informations sont fournies sur le risques de blessures.
CD-ROM, la disquette ou tout autre périphérique de
stockage inclus dans l'emballage contenant ce dispositif. MISE EN GARDE
Ce support doit être conservé avec cet appareil à tout
moment. Une copie papier de ces informations peut être Empêcher la pénétration de corps étrangers, tels que
commandée auprès du service de documentation Eaton. morceaux de fils et copeaux métalliques, dans le boîtier de
l'entraînement, car ceci pourrait provoquer la formation d'un
AVERTISSEMENT arc électrique et un incendie.
Avant de procéder à l'entretien de l'entraînement : MISE EN GARDE

● Débrancher toute l'alimentation allant à l'entraîne- Installer cet entraînement dans une pièce bien aérée non
ment, y compris l'alimentation de commande externe soumise à des températures extrêmes, à une forte humidité
pouvant être présente. ou à la condensation. Éviter les endroits directement
● Placer une étiquette « NE PAS UTILISER » sur le exposés au soleil ou présentant de fortes concentrations de
dispositif de déconnexion. poussières, des gaz corrosifs, des gaz explosifs, des gaz
inflammables, ou des vapeurs de liquide de meulage, etc.
● Verrouiller le dispositif de déconnexion en position Une installation inadéquate peut entraîner un risque
ouverte. d'incendie.
Le non-respect de ces instructions peut entraîner la mort
ou des blessures graves. MISE EN GARDE
Lors de la sélection de la section transversale des câbles,
AVERTISSEMENT prendre en compte la chute de tension dans des conditions
de charge. La prise en compte d'autres paramètres relève de
Les sorties de l'entraînement (U, V, W) ne doivent pas
la responsabilité de l'utilisateur.
être connectées à la tension d'entrée ni à l'alimentation
secteur, car ceci pourrait gravement endommager Il relève de la responsabilité de l'utilisateur de respecter
l'appareil et causer un incendie. toutes les normes électriques nationales et internationales
en vigueur concernant la mise à la terre de protection de
AVERTISSEMENT l'ensemble de l'équipement.
Le dissipateur de chaleur et/ou le boîtier externe peuvent

atteindre une température élevée.
MISE EN GARDE
Les spécifications minimum relatives aux sections
Prêter attention aux avertissements signalant des
transversales des conducteurs de terre de protection
dangers ! indiquées dans ce manuel doivent être respectées.
Le courant de fuite de cet équipement dépasse 3,5 mA (CA).
La taille minimum du conducteur de la mise à la terre de
protection doit être conforme aux exigences de la norme
Surface brûlante - Risque de brûlure. NE PAS TOUCHER !
EN 61800-5-1 et/ou aux réglementations de sécurité locales.
MISE EN GARDE MISE EN GARDE

Toute modification électrique ou mécanique de cet
Les courants de fuite de ce convertisseur de fréquence sont
entraînement sans consentement écrit préalable d'Eaton
supérieures à 3,5 mA (CA). Conformément à la norme CEI/
annule toutes les garanties, peut entraîner un danger pour la
EN 61800-5-1, un conducteur de mise à la terre de
sécurité et annuler l'homologation UL®.
l'équipement supplémentaire possédant la même superficie
de coupe transversale que le conducteur de mise à la terre
MISE EN GARDE de protection d'origine doit être branché, ou la section
transversale du conducteur de mise à la terre de
Installer cet entraînement sur une matière résistante aux
l'équipement doit être d'au moins 10 mm2 Cu. Seul un
flammes, telle qu'une plaque d'acier, pour réduire les risques
conducteur en cuivre doit être utilisé avec cet entraînement.
d'incendie.
xviii DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

DG1 Series VFD
● Ne pas tenter d'installer ou de retirer les vis des VOM et

MISE EN GARDE CEM lorsque l'alimentation est appliquée aux bornes
Les entrées anti-rebond ne sont pas permises dans le d'entrée de l'entraînement.
schéma du circuit de sécurité. Des disjoncteurs de courant
résiduel (RCD) ne peuvent être installés qu'entre le réseau
de courant alternatif et l'entraînement.
Sécurité du moteur et de l'équipement
MISE EN GARDE
MISE EN GARDE
Les entrées anti-rebond ne sont pas permises dans le
schéma du circuit de sécurité. Si plusieurs moteurs sont n'effectuer aucun test de résistance de tension ou au
connectés à un entraînement, des contacteurs doivent être mégohmmètre sur toute partie de l'entraînement ou de ses
conçus pour les moteurs individuels conformément à la composants. Un test inadéquat peut entraîner des
catégorie d'utilisation AC-3. dommages.
Sélectionner du contacteur du moteur en fonction du courant

de fonctionnement nominal du moteur à connecter. MISE EN GARDE
Avant tout test ou mesure du moteur ou du câble du moteur,
MISE EN GARDE débrancher le câble du moteur au niveau des bornes de
sortie de l'entraînement (U, V, W) pour éviter d'endommager
Les entrées anti-rebond ne sont pas permises dans le ce dernier lors des tests.
schéma du circuit de sécurité. Une commutation entre
l'entraînement et l'alimentation d'entrée doit avoir lieu dans
un état sans tension. MISE EN GARDE
Ne toucher aucun composant sur les cartes de circuit. Les
MISE EN GARDE décharges d'électricité statique peuvent endommager les
composants.
Les entrées anti-rebond ne sont pas permises dans le
schéma du circuit de sécurité. Risque d'incendie !
MISE EN GARDE
Utiliser uniquement des câbles, des interrupteurs de
protection et des contacteurs indiquant le courant nominal Avant de mettre le moteur en marche, vérifier qu'il est
permis. correctement monté et aligné avec l'équipement entraîné.
S'assurer que le démarrage du moteur ne risque pas de
provoquer des blessures ou d'endommager l'équipement
MISE EN GARDE connecté au moteur.
Avant de connecter l'entraînement à l'alimentation secteur
CA, s'assurer que les réglages de la classe de protection MISE EN GARDE
CEM sont correctement effectués selon les instructions de
ce manuel. Régler la vitesse maximale du moteur (fréquence) dans
l'entraînement conformément aux exigences du moteur et
● Si l'entraînement doit être utilisé dans un réseau de de l'équipement qui lui est connecté. Des réglages de
distribution flottant, retirer les vis au niveau des VOM et fréquence maximum incorrects peuvent endommager le
CEM. Voir « Installation dans un réseau à une phase moteur ou l'équipement et causer des blessures.
connectée à la terre (corner-grounded) » et « Installation
dans un réseau IT». MISE EN GARDE
● Débrancher le filtre CEM interne lors de l'installation de Avant d'inverser le sens de rotation du moteur, veiller à ce
l'entraînement sur un réseau IT (système d'alimentation que cela ne risque pas de provoquer des blessures ou des
non mis à la terre ou système d’alimentation électrique dommages matériels.
mis à la terre haute résistance [plus de 30 ohms]) pour ne
pas que le système soit connecté au potentiel de terre via
les condensateurs du filtre CEM. Ceci peut être une cause MISE EN GARDE
de dangers ou endommager l'entraînement. S'assurer qu'aucun condensateur de correction de puissance
● Débrancher le filtre CEM interne lors de l'installation de n'est connecté à la sortie de l'entraînement ou aux bornes du
l'entraînement sur un système TN à une phase connectée moteur pour éviter un mauvais fonctionnement de
à la terre pour ne pas endommager l'entraînement. l'entraînement et des dommages potentiels.
Note: Lorsque le filtre CEM interne est débranché,
l'entraînement peut ne pas être conforme aux normes
MISE EN GARDE
de compatibilité électromagnétique. S'assurer que les bornes de sortie de l'entraînement (U, V,
W) ne sont pas connectées à l'alimentation secteur, ce qui
pourrait causer de graves dommages à l'entraînement.
DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com xix

DG1 Series VFD
MISE EN GARDE MISE EN GARDE

Lorsque les bornes de commande de deux ou plusieurs Fonctionnement incorrect de l'entraînement :
unités d'entraînement sont raccordées en parallèle, la
tension auxiliaire de ces connexions de commande doit être
● Si l'entraînement n'est pas mis en marche pendant une
fournie par une source unique, qui peut être soit l'une des longue période, la performance de ses condensateurs
unités, soit une alimentation externe. électrolytiques sera réduite.
● S'il est arrêté pour une période prolongée, le mettre en
MISE EN GARDE marche au moins tous les six mois pendant au moins 5
heures pour restaurer la performance des condensateurs,
L'entraînement démarre automatiquement après une puis vérifier son fonctionnement. Il est recommandé de ne
interruption de la tension d'entrée si la commande de pas brancher l'entraînement directement sur la tension
démarrage externe est active. secteur. La tension doit être augmentée progressivement
en utilisant une source CA réglable.
MISE EN GARDE Le non-respect de ces instructions peut entraîner des
Ne pas commander le moteur avec le dispositif de blessures ou des dégâts matériels.
déconnexion ; à la place, utiliser les touches de marche et
Pour plus d'informations techniques, contacter l'usine ou le
d'arrêt du tableau de contrôle ou les commandes du tableau
représentant commercial Eaton local.
des E/S de l'entraînement. Le nombre de cycles de charge
maximum permis des condensateurs CC (c'est-à-dire les
mises sous tension par application de puissance) est de cinq
en dix minutes.
xx DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

Chapter 1—PowerXL DG1 Series Overview

This chapter describes the purpose and contents of this Real Time Clock Battery Activation
manual, the receiving inspection recommendations and the
DG1 Series Open Drive catalog numbering system. To activate the real time clock (RTC) functionality in the
PowerXL DG1 Series AFD, the RTC battery (already mounted
in the drive) must be connected to the control board.
How to Use this Manual Simply remove the primary drive cover, locate the RTC
battery directly below the keypad, and connect the white
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with information 2-wire connector to the receptacle on the control board.
necessary to install, set and customize parameters, start up,
troubleshoot and maintain the Eaton DG1 Series adjustable Figure 1. RTC Battery Connection
frequency drive (AFD). To provide for safe installation and
operation of the equipment, read the safety guidelines at the
beginning of this manual and follow the procedures outlined
in the following chapters before connecting power to the
DG1 Series AFD. Keep this operating manual handy and
distribute to all users, technicians and maintenance
personnel for reference.
Receiving and Inspection

The DG1 Series AFD has met a stringent series of factory
quality requirements before shipment. It is possible that
packaging or equipment damage may have occurred during
shipment. After receiving your DG1 Series AFD, please
check for the following:
Check to make sure that the package includes the Instruction
Leaflet (IL040016EN), Quick Start Guide (MN040006EN),
User Manual CD (CD040002EN) and accessory packet. The
accessory packet includes:
● Rubber grommets
● Control cable grounding clamps
● Additional grounding screw
Inspect the unit to ensure it was not damaged during
shipment.
Table 1. Common Abbreviations
Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate Abbreviation Definition
corresponds with the catalog number on your order.
CT Constant torque with high overload rating (150%)
If shipping damage has occurred, please contact and file a
claim with the carrier involved immediately. VT Variable torque with low overload rating (110%)
IH High Overload Current (150%)
If the delivery does not correspond to your order, please
contact your Eaton Electrical representative. IL Low Overload Current (110%)
Note: Do not destroy the packing. The template printed AFD Adjustable Frequency Drive
on the protective cardboard can be used for marking VFD Variable Frequency Drive
the mounting points of the DG1 AFD on the wall or
in a cabinet.
PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com 1

Rating Label
Figure 2. Rating Label
Contains
Contains SN, PN,
EAN Code Type, Date
Contains
NAED Code
Date Code: 20131118
Carton Labels (U.S. and Europe)

Same as rating label shown above.
2 PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

Catalog Number System

Figure 3. Catalog Numbering System
Series Power Part Options
D G1 – 3 4 4D3 F B – C 21 C
Basic Naming Coating of Boards
D = Drive C = Coated
Series Phase Reference Internal Brake Chopper Enclosure (IP Rating)

G1 = General purpose 3 = 3~ INPUT/3~ OUTPUT N = No brake chopper 20 = IP20
B = Brake chopper 21 = IP21/Type 1
54 = IP54/Type 12
Input/Output Voltage Rating
2 = 230 V (208–240 V, –15%, +10%) Internal EMC Filter
4 = 400 V (380–500 V, –15%, +10%) D= DC choke only Display Option
5 = 600 V (525–600 V, –15%, +10%) E = EMC filter only C = LCD (graphical)
F = Internal EMC filter and DC choke N = No display
N= No EMC filter, no DC choke
Output Current Rating (CT)
208–240 V 380–500 V 525–600 V
3D7 = 3.7 A, 0.55 kW, 0.75 hp 2D2 = 2.2 A, 0.75 kW, 1 hp 3D3 = 3.3 A, 1.5 kW, 2 hp
4D8 = 4.8 A, 0.75 kW, 1 hp 3D3 = 3.3 A, 1.1 kW, 1.5 hp 4D5 = 4.5 A, 2.2 kW, 3 hp
6D6 = 6.6 A, 1.1 kW, 1.5 hp 4D3 = 4.3 A, 1.5 kW, 2 hp 7D5 = 7.5 A, 3.7 kW, 5 hp
7D8 = 7.8 A, 1.5 kW, 2 hp 5D6 = 5.6 A, 2.2 kW, 3 hp 010 = 10 A, 5.5 kW, 7.5 hp
011 = 11 A, 2.2 kW, 3 hp 7D6 = 7.6 A, 3 kW, 5 hp 013 = 13.5 A, 7.5 kW, 10 hp
012 = 12.5 A, 3 kW, 5 hp (VT) 9D0 = 9 A, 4 kW, 7.5 hp (VT) 018 = 18 A, 11 kW, 15 hp
017 = 17.5 A, 3.7 kW, 5 hp 012 = 12 A, 5.5 kW, 7.5 hp 022 = 22 A, 15 kW, 20 hp
025 = 25 A, 5.5 kW, 7.5 hp 016 = 16 A, 7.5 kW, 10 hp 027 = 27 A, 18 kW, 25 hp
031 = 31 A, 7.5 kW, 10 hp 023 = 23 A, 11 kW, 15 hp 034 = 34 A, 22 kW, 30 hp
048 = 48 A, 11 kW, 15 hp 031 = 31 A, 15 kW, 20 hp 041 = 41 A, 30 kW, 40 hp
075 = 75 A, 18.5 kW, 25 hp 046 = 46 A, 22 kW, 30 hp 062 = 62 A, 45 kW, 60 hp
248 = 248 A, 75 kW, 100 hp 170 = 170 A, 90 kW, 125 hp
205 = 205 A, 110 kW, 150 hp
245 = 245 A, 150 kW, 200 hp

Power Ratings and Product Selection

DG1 Series Drives—208–240 Volt
Table 2. Type 1/IP21
Constant Torque (CT) / High Overload (IH) Variable Torque (VT) / Low Overload (IL)
230 V, 50 Hz 230 V, 60 Hz Current 230 V, 50 Hz 230 V, 60 Hz Current
Frame Size kW Rating hp A kW Rating hp A Catalog Number
FR1 0.55 0.75 3.7 0.75 1 4.8 DG1-323D7FB-C21C
0.75 1 4.8 1.1 1.5 6.6 DG1-324D8FB-C21C
1.1 1.5 6.6 1.5 2 7.8 DG1-326D6FB-C21C
1.5 2 7.8 2.2 3 11 DG1-327D8FB-C21C
2.2 3 11 3 — 12.5 DG1-32011FB-C21C
FR2 3 — 12.5 3.7 5 17.5 DG1-32012FB-C21C
3.7 5 17.5 5.5 7.5 25 DG1-32017FB-C21C
5.5 7.5 25 7.5 10 31 DG1-32025FB-C21C
FR3 7.5 10 31 11 15 48 DG1-32031FB-C21C
11 15 48 15 20 61 DG1-32048FB-C21C
FR4 15 20 61 18.5 25 75 DG1-32061FN-C21C
18.5 25 75 22 30 88 DG1-32075FN-C21C
22 30 88 30 40 114 DG1-32088FN-C21C
FR5 30 40 114 37 50 143 DG1-32114FN-C21C
37 50 143 45 60 170 DG1-32143FN-C21C
45 60 170 55 75 211 DG1-32170FN-C21C
FR6 1 55 75 211 75 100 261 DG1-32211FN-C21C
75 100 248 90 125 312 DG1-32248FN-C21C

FR1 0.55 0.75 3.7 0.75 1 4.8 DG1-323D7FB-C54C
0.75 1 4.8 1.1 1.5 6.6 DG1-324D8FB-C54C
1.1 1.5 6.6 1.5 2 7.8 DG1-326D6FB-C54C
1.5 2 7.8 2.2 3 11 DG1-327D8FB-C54C
2.2 3 11 3 — 12.5 DG1-32011FB-C54C
FR2 3 — 12.5 3.7 5 17.5 DG1-32012FB-C54C
3.7 5 17.5 5.5 7.5 25 DG1-32017FB-C54C
5.5 7.5 25 7.5 10 31 DG1-32025FB-C54C
FR3 7.5 10 31 11 15 48 DG1-32031FB-C54C
11 15 48 15 20 61 DG1-32048FB-C54C
FR4 15 20 61 18.5 25 75 DG1-32061FN-C54C
18.5 25 75 22 30 88 DG1-32075FN-C54C
22 30 88 30 40 114 DG1-32088FN-C54C
FR5 30 40 114 37 50 143 DG1-32114FN-C54C
37 50 143 45 60 170 DG1-32143FN-C54C
45 60 170 55 75 211 DG1-32170FN-C54C
FR6 1 55 75 211 75 100 261 DG1-32211FN-C54C
75 100 248 90 125 312 DG1-32248FN-C54C
Note
1 FR6 available in 2016.

DG1 Series Drives—380–500 Volt

FR1 0.75 1 2.2 1.1 1.5 3.3 DG1-342D2FB-C21C
1.1 1.5 3.3 1.5 2 4.3 DG1-343D3FB-C21C
1.5 2 4.3 2.2 3 5.6 DG1-344D3FB-C21C
2.2 3 5.6 3 5 7.6 DG1-345D6FB-C21C
3 5 7.6 4 — 9 DG1-347D6FB-C21C
4 — 9 5.5 7.5 12 DG1-349D0FB-C21C
FR2 5.5 7.5 12 7.5 10 16 DG1-34012FB-C21C
7.5 10 16 11 15 23 DG1-34016FB-C21C
11 15 23 15 20 31 DG1-34023FB-C21C
FR3 15 20 31 18.5 25 38 DG1-34031FB-C21C
18.5 25 38 22 30 46 DG1-34038FB-C21C
22 30 46 30 40 61 DG1-34046FB-C21C
FR4 30 40 61 37 50 72 DG1-34061FN-C21C
37 50 72 45 60 87 DG1-34072FN-C21C
45 60 87 55 75 105 DG1-34087FN-C21C
FR5 55 75 105 75 100 140 DG1-34105FN-C21C
75 100 140 90 125 170 DG1-34140FN-C21C
90 125 170 110 150 205 DG1-34170FN-C21C
FR6 1 110 150 205 132 200 261 DG1-34205FN-C21C
150 200 245 160 250 310 DG1-34245FN-C21C

FR1 0.75 1 2.2 1.1 1.5 3.3 DG1-342D2FB-C54C
1.1 1.5 3.3 1.5 2 4.3 DG1-343D3FB-C54C
1.5 2 4.3 2.2 3 5.6 DG1-344D3FB-C54C
2.2 3 5.6 3 5 7.6 DG1-345D6FB-C54C
3 5 7.6 4 — 9 DG1-347D6FB-C54C
4 — 9 5.5 7.5 12 DG1-349D0FB-C54C
FR2 5.5 7.5 12 7.5 10 16 DG1-34012FB-C54C
7.5 10 16 11 15 23 DG1-34016FB-C54C
11 15 23 15 20 31 DG1-34023FB-C54C
FR3 15 20 31 18.5 25 38 DG1-34031FB-C54C
18.5 25 38 22 30 46 DG1-34038FB-C54C
22 30 46 30 40 61 DG1-34046FB-C54C
FR4 30 40 61 37 50 72 DG1-34061FN-C54C
37 50 72 45 60 87 DG1-34072FN-C54C
45 60 87 55 75 105 DG1-34087FN-C54C
FR5 55 75 105 75 100 140 DG1-34105FN-C54C
75 100 140 90 125 170 DG1-34140FN-C54C
90 125 170 110 150 205 DG1-34170FN-C54C
FR6 1 110 150 205 132 200 261 DG1-34205FN-C54C
150 200 245 160 250 310 DG1-34245FN-C54C
Note

DG1 Series Drives—600 Volt 1

FR1 1.5 2 3.3 2.2 3 4.5 DG1-353D3FB-C21C
2.2 3 4.5 3.7 5 7.5 DG1-354D5FB-C21C
3.7 5 7.5 5.5 7.5 10 DG1-357D5FB-C21C
FR2 5.5 7.5 10 7.5 10 13.5 DG1-35010FB-C21C
7.5 10 13.5 11 15 18 DG1-35013FB-C21C
11 15 18 15 20 22 DG1-35018FB-C21C
FR3 15 20 22 18.5 25 27 DG1-35022FB-C21C
18.5 25 27 22 30 34 DG1-35027FB-C21C
22 30 34 30 40 41 DG1-35034FB-C21C
FR4 30 40 41 37 50 52 DG1-35041FN-C21C
37 50 52 45 60 62 DG1-35052FN-C21C
45 60 62 55 75 80 DG1-35062FN-C21C
FR5 55 75 80 75 100 100 DG1-35080FN-C21C
75 100 100 90 125 125 DG1-35100FN-C21C
90 125 125 110 150 144 DG1-35125FN-C21C
FR6 2 110 150 144 150 200 208 DG1-35144FN-C21C
150 200 208 187 250 250 DG1-35208FN-C21C

FR1 1.5 2 3.3 2.2 3 4.5 DG1-353D3FB-C54C
2.2 3 4.5 3.7 5 7.5 DG1-354D5FB-C54C
3.7 5 7.5 5.5 7.5 10 DG1-357D5FB-C54C
FR2 5.5 7.5 10 7.5 10 13.5 DG1-35010FB-C54C
7.5 10 13.5 11 15 18 DG1-35013FB-C54C
11 15 18 15 20 22 DG1-35018FB-C54C
FR3 15 20 22 18.5 25 27 DG1-35022FB-C54C
18.5 25 27 22 30 34 DG1-35027FB-C54C
22 30 34 30 40 41 DG1-35034FB-C54C
FR4 30 40 41 37 50 52 DG1-35041FN-C54C
37 50 52 45 60 62 DG1-35052FN-C54C
45 60 62 55 75 80 DG1-35062FN-C54C
FR5 55 75 80 75 100 100 DG1-35080FN-C54C
75 100 100 90 125 125 DG1-35100FN-C54C
90 125 125 110 150 144 DG1-35125FN-C54C
FR6 2 110 150 144 150 200 208 DG1-35144FN-C54C
150 200 208 187 250 250 DG1-35208FN-C54C
Notes
1 600 V available May 2015.

Chapter 2—Keypad Overview

The keypad is the interface between the drive and the user.
It features an LCD display, 3 LED lights and 11 buttons. With
the control keypad, it is possible to control the speed of a
motor, to supervise the state of the equipment and to set the
frequency converter’s parameters. See Figure 4.
Figure 4. Keypad and Display
Programmable Soft Key 1 Programmable Soft Key 2
Increase Value
Scroll Menu Up
Change Control Place Between
Local and Remote
Move Cursor Right
Back/Reset Button
Start Button
Stop Button
Move Cursor Left

Enter Menu Decrease Value
Confirm Selection Scroll Menu Down

Keypad Buttons
Buttons Description
Table 8. Keypad Buttons
Icon Button Description
Soft Key 1, Soft Key 1, Soft Key 2:
Soft Key 2 The functions of these two buttons shall be the following:
• Forward/Reverse, this shall change motor’s run direction.
• Menu, this shall return to main menu.
• Details, this shall display the details of the fault.
• Bypass, this shall make drive go into bypass.
• Jog, this shall activate jog.
• Favorite, this shall add this parameter to the Favorite menu.
• Delete, this shall delete this parameter from the Favorite menu.
Back/Reset Back/Reset:
This button has three integrated functions. The button operates as backward button
during normal mode.
In edit mode, it is used as cancel operate. It is also used to reset faults when faults occur.
• Backs up one step.
• Cancels Modify in edit mode.
• Resets the active faults (all the active faults shall be reset by pressing this button
more than 2 seconds in any page).
• Hold Stop and Back Reset for 5 seconds to return drive to factory default
Local/Remote Local/Remote:
Switches between LOCAL and REMOTE control for start and speed reference. The control
locations corresponding to local and remote shall be selected within an application.
Up Up and Down Arrows:

Down • Move either up or down a menu list to select the desired menu item.
• Editing a parameter bit by bit, while the active digit is scrolled.
• Increase/decrease the reference value of the selected parameter.
• In parameter comparison mode, scroll through the parameters of which current
value is different from comparison parameter value.
• In parameter page when in read mode, move to the previous or next brother
parameter of this parameter.

Table 8. Keypad Buttons, continued

Icon Button Description
Left Left Arrow:
• Navigation button, movement to left when editing a parameter digit by digit.
• Backs up one step.
Right Right Arrow:

• Enter parameter group mode.
• Enter parameter mode from group mode.
• Enter parameter whole edit mode when this parameter can be written.
• Enter parameter bit by bit edit mode from whole edit mode.
• Navigation button, movement to right when editing a parameter bit by bit.
OK OK:
• Will clear all the fault history if pressed for more than 5 seconds (including
5 seconds) in any page.
• This button is used in the parameter edit mode to save the parameter setting.
• To confirm the start-up list at the end of the Start-Up Wizard.
• To confirm the comparison item in parameters comparison mode.
The following is the same with Right key:
• Enter parameter whole edit mode when this parameter can be written.
• Enter parameter group mode.
• Enter parameter mode from group mode.
Stop Stop:
This button operates as the motor stop button for normal operation. The default is for
this button to always be active. It can be changed in parameter P7.5 to only when
“Keypad” is selected as the control source.
• Motor stop from the keypad.
Start Start:
This button operates as motor start button for normal operation when the “Keypad” is
selected as the active control source.
When Keypad is the reference place after hitting the start button, it will jump directly
to the Keypad Ref Screen.

LED Lights The lines definition is as below:

The first line is State line, shows:
Table 9. LED State Indicators ● RUN / STP / NRD—If motor is running, the run state shall
Indicator Description display “RUN”, otherwise the state display “STP”. “RUN”
blinks when the stop command is sent but the drive is
Run:
decelerating. “NRD” is displayed if the drive is not ready or
Indicates that the VFD is running and controlling the load in does not have a signal
Run Drive or Bypass.
Blinks when a stop command has been given but the drive is ● FWD / REV—If the motor running direction is clockwise,
still ramping down. display “FWD”, otherwise display “REV”
Fault: ● KEY / I/O / BPS / BUS—If it is in bypass currently, display
Turn on when there is one or more active drive fault(s). “BPS”; otherwise, if the current control source is I/O
Fault Blinks when there is one or more active drive warning(s). terminal, display “I/O”. If it is keypad, then display “KEY”;
Local/Remote: otherwise display “BUS”
Local: If the local control place is selected, the light will be on. ● PAR / MON / FLT / OPE / QSW / FAV / TPM—If the
Remote Remote: If the remote control place is selected, the light will current page is parameter menu, display “PAR”; If monitor
be off. menu, then display “MON”; If fault menu, then display
“FLT”; If operation menu, then display “OPE”; If quick
start wizard, then display “QSW”; If optional card menu,
LCD Display then display “BOA”; If favorite menu, then display “FAV”;
If main menu, then display “TPM”
The keypad LCD indicates the status of the motor and the
drive and any faults in motor or drive functions. On the LCD, The second line is Code line, shows the menu code.
the user sees information about the current location in the The third line is Name line, shows the menu name or
menu structure and the item displayed. parameters name.
The fourth line is Value line, shows the submenu name or
Overview parameters value.
Five lines shall be displayed in the screen. General view is as The fifth line is Soft key line, the functions of Soft key 1 and
following in Figure 5. Soft key 2 are changeable, and the real time is in the middle.
Figure 5. General View of LCD
Welcome Page
Direction Status Menu Location
Drive Status Control Place LCD shall show the welcome page when power on. See
Figure 6.
Figure 6. Welcome Page
Active
Selection
Real Time Clock

(hh:mm)
Soft Key 1 Soft Key 2
Function Label Function Label

Upgrade Page Soft Key Description

After welcome page, keypad will check whether there is There are two soft key buttons. They have different
different keypad firmware version in MCU’s serial flash. If definitions under different pages.
yes, then ask user whether to upgrade the keypad.
Table 10. Soft Keys
Figure 7. Upgrade Page Keypad Default Default
Display Page Soft Key 1 Soft Key 2
Main Menu Page NULL or BYPASS JOG
Group Node Page REVERSE or FORWARD MENU
Parameter Node Page NULL or FAVORITE MENU
Favorite Page DELETE MENU
Fault Page DETAIL MENU
1. In the main menu (root node), “JOG” shall be shown on

the right. If bypass is enabled, then “BYPASS” shall be
shown on the left. Otherwise, it will not be shown. See
Figure 9.
Auto Backup Page
Figure 9. Main Menu
If keypad is plugged into a new drive, then auto backup page
will be shown to notice the user whether to do the upload/
download.
Figure 8. Auto Backup Page
STP FWD KEY MON

Download from keypad
No Action
Upload to keypad 2. For the parameter group, the two soft keys “REVERSE/
FORWARD” and “MENU” shall be shown. See Figure 10.
13:53 Figure 10. Parent Node Page

3. For the parameter menu, if this parameter hasn’t been 5. For the fault group, two soft keys “DETAIL” and
added into the favorite list, two soft keys “FAVORITE” “MENU” shall be shown. See Figure 13. For more
and “MENU” shall be shown. If it has been added into information, see Page 16.
the favorite list, only one soft key “MENU” is shown in
the right. Figure 13. Fault Page
Figure 11. Parameter Page
4. If one parameter has been added to the favorite list, it

shall appear in the favorite menu. Then when you enter
into the favorite menu, two soft keys “DELETE” and
“MENU” shall be shown, and “DELETE” means you can
delete the selected parameter from favorite list. See
Figure 12.
Figure 12. Parameter Page from Favorite Menu

Chapter 3—Menu Overview
Main Menu Page

The data on the keypad are arranged in menus and
sub-menus. The first menu level consists of M, P, F, B, T,
O and S, and it is called the Main Menu.
Figure 14. Main Menu Page
Menu Navigation
This section provides basic instruction on navigating each
section in the menu structure.
Figure 15. Main Menu Navigation
M46 – Multi-Monitoring
P1.15 – Reverse Enable

Menu Structure
Table 11. Keypad Menus
Item Description Item Description Item Description
Monitor M1—Output Frequency M24—Interval 3 Parameters P1—Basic Parameters Fault F1—Active Fault
M2—Freq Reference M25—Interval 4 P2—Analog Input F2—History Fault
M3—Motor Speed M26—Interval 5 P3—Digital Input Optional Boards Bx—SlotA
M4—Motor Current M27—Timer 1 P4—Analog Output Bx—SlotB
M5—Motor Torque M28—Timer 2 P5—Digital Output Favorite —
M6—Motor Power M29—Timer 3 P6—Logic Function Operate Mode O1—Output Frequency
M7—Motor Voltage M30—PID1 Set Point P7—Drive Control O2—Freq Reference
M8—DC-link Voltage M31—PID1 Feedback P8—Motor Control O3—Motor Speed
M9—Unit Temperature M32—PID1 Error Value P9—Protections O4—Motor Current
M10—Motor Temperature M33—PID1 Output P10—PID Controller1 05—Motor Torque
M11—Torque Reference M34—PID1 Status P11—PID Controller2 O6—Motor Power
M12—Analog Input 1 M35—PID2 Set Point P12—Preset Speed O7—Motor Voltage
M13—Analog Input 2 M36—PID2 Feedback P13—Torque Control O8—DC-Link Voltage
M14—Analog Output 1 M37—PID2 Error Value P14—Brake O9—Unit Temperature
M15—Analog Output 2 M38—PID2 Output P15—Fire Mode O10—Motor Temperature
M16—DI1, DI2, DI3 M39—PID2 Status P16—Second Motor Para R11—Keypad Torque Ref
M17—DI4, DI5, DI6 M40—Running Aux Drives P17—Bypass R12—Keypad Reference
M18—DI7, DI8 M41—PT100 Temp P18—Multi-Pump Ctrl R13—PID1 Keypad Setpoint 1
M19—DO1 M42—Last Active Fault P19—Real Time Clock R14—PID1 Keypad Setpoint 2
M20—RO1, RO2, RO3 M43—RTC Battery Status P20—Communication Startup Wizard S—Startup Wizard
M21—TC1, TC2, TC3 M44—Instance Motor Power P21—System
M22—Interval 1 M45—Energy Savings
M23—Interval 2 M46—Multi-Monitoring
Note: Will vary depending on application selected.

M—Monitor
In monitor page, user shall not be able to edit the parameters except multi-monitor parameter. Multi-monitor parameters
allow for displaying 3 monitor values on display. The three values can be changed to any of the listed values.
The navigation for monitor is as Figure 16.
Figure 16. M—Monitor

F—Fault After the DETAIL soft key is pressed, the following detail
information about the fault shall be shown: fault code, type,
There are three fault pages. The first one is F1 active faults; power day count, power hour count, frequency, current,
the second one will pop-up automatically when fault occurs; voltage, power, torque, DC voltage, unit temperature, run
the third one is F2 fault history. status, direction, warning, zero speed, Mwh count, at
If there is no active fault/history fault, then “No fault” shall be reference.
shown.
Active Fault
The navigation for active faults is as Figure 17.
Figure 17. Active Faults

Pop-up Fault
The navigation for the pop-up active fault is as Figure 18.
Figure 18. Pop-Up Active Faults
The latest active fault page shall pop up when there is a new
active fault, the pop-up fault page is the same as the active
fault page.
Pressing the back/reset key less than 2 seconds shall back to
the last page user is watching.
Pressing the back/reset key more than 2 seconds shall reset
all active faults when all the active fault condition is not
satisfied.
User shall be able to navigate all the active faults by up/down
key.
The page for active faults and pop-up faults are the same,
except one: the response to the “Back” key. In active faults
page, if the Back key is pressed, it returns to the last level
menu. In pop-up faults page, it returns to the last page.

Fault History
The navigation for fault history is as Figure 19.
In any page, OK button is used to clear all the active faults
and fault history by pressing more than 5s without password.
Figure 19. Fault History

P—Parameter In parameter page, the value of parameter and unit shall be

shown in the fourth line (0.00 Hz).
The navigation for the parameter menu is shown in Figure 20.
If the parameter is read and write, then pressing the right key
In parameter page, the parameter code shall be shown in the shall make the parameter value flash, which means that the
second line (such as P1.1). value can be edited.
In parameter page, the parameter name shall be shown in If the parameter is read only, then pressing the right key will
the third line (such as Min Frequency). not have any effect, which means that the value can’t be
edited.
Figure 20. Parameter Menu Overview
There are several special pages:

1. P21.1.3 Parameter Sets. See Figure 21.
User shall be able to load or store parameters. The options
are as follows: Reload Defaults, Reload Set 1, Reload Set 2,
Store Set 1, Store Set 2, Reset, Reload Defaults VM. The
special points are:
● During this operation, “waiting…” shall flash, which
means it is in process.
● When it is finished, “OK” shall be shown.
● Drive shall restart after default parameters are loaded.
● “Reload Defaults VM” is for the sales stand. Do not use
on a fully functioning drive

Figure 21. Parameter Sets

2. P21.1.4 Up to keypad and P21.1.5 Down from keypad

During this operation, “waiting…” shall flash, which This stores the parameters to keypad for transferring.
means it is in process. When it is finished, “OK” shall be Down from keypad is to download parameters from
shown. keypad to drive.
Figure 22. Down From Keypad

3. P21.1.6 Parameters Comparison

After the operation, the number of different parameter If the user wants to modify the current value, user shall
will be shown. Then press the right key; the first be able to enter the edit mode by right key.
different parameter shall be shown.
User shall be able to browse all the different parameters
The parameter name shall be shown in the second line, by up/down key.
and the value which is from keypad/default/set1/set2
shall be shown in the third line, the current value shall be During this operation, “waiting…” shall flash, which
shown in the fourth line. means it is in process.
When it is finished, “OK” shall be shown. See
Figure 23.
Figure 23. Parameters Comparison
Parameter Name
Compared Value
(keypad, default, set1, set2)
Current Value in Drive

4. P21.1.7 Password
Password protects the parameters’ security. Zero means Enter the password setting page. If the password is
not used, otherwise in use. If password is in use, user 0000, then the “Not use” shall be shown. If the
can still see the values of parameters, but needs to password is not 0000, then the “in use” shall be shown.
enter the password before editing. User must enter
current password before changing the password. If the password is in use, and user inputs the wrong
password, then the “failed” shall be shown.
0000 shall mean that the password is not used, the
password is 0000 by default. After “failed” is shown 3 seconds, the page shall return
to the parameter read page.
The password range shall be 0001–9999, the setting of
password and checking of password are as Figure 4-21. If the password is in use, and user inputs the right
password, then the value shall flash, which indicates that
it can be edited.
Figure 24. Password
STP FWD KEY PAR STP FWD KEY PAR STP FWD KEY PAR
P21.1.6 ParamComparion P21.1.7 P21.1.7
Right/OK key Right key
P21.1.7 - Password Password Password
P21.1.8 Parameter Lock Not use 0000
REVERSE 13:53 MENU FAVORITE 13:53 MENU FAVORITE 13:53 MENU
Up key
STP FWD KEY PAR STP FWD KEY PAR

P21.1.7 P21.1.7
OK key
Password Password
In use 0001
FAVORITE 13:53 MENU FAVORITE 13:53 MENU
STP FWD KEY PAR STP FWD KEY PAR STP FWD KEY PAR
P2.1 AI1 Mode P2.2 P2.2
Right/OK key AI1 Signal Range Right key Password?
P2.2 AI1 Signal Range
0-100% Password in use 0000

P2.3 AI1 Custom Min STP
FAVORITE 13:53 MENU FAVORITE 13:53 MENU FAVORITE 13:53 MENU
Up key

P2.2 P2.2
AI1 Signal Range OK key Password?
0-100% Password right
0001
FAVORITE 13:53 MENU FAVORITE 13:53 MENU
OK key Password wrong
STP FWD KEY PAR

P2.2
After 3s
Password?
Failed
FAVORITE 13:53 MENU
Note: Please contact Eaton customer support if password is

forgotten. Factory override password is “1001”. This
will override any password. If used to override a
password, be sure to set the password to a new value
for future use.

Value Edit
This topic shows the methods to edit value, and what will For details, please see Figure 25. For the editable parameter,
happen to edit value when password is in use and parameter press “Right” key once to enter the read mode (just read the
lock is enabled. value of this parameter), press “Right” key again to enter the
edit mode (user can modify the value of this parameter),
We have three methods to edit value: edit by key press-hold, press “Right” key again to enter the bit-by-bit edit mode.
edit bit by bit, edit click by click.
User shall use Left/Right key to change the current editable
bit. When editing one number, it increases/decreases
circularly, for example, pressing Up key can change to
9 from 0.
Figure 25. Edit Parameter Value

1. If password is in use, password shall be needed to check

before edit parameter value.
2. If no action in 1min, the password shall need to be
checked again.
3. If Parameter locked is enabled, *Locked* shall be shown
if user tries to edit the parameter.
Figure 26. Parameter Locked

P2.1 AI1 Mode P2.2
Right/OK key AI1 Signal Range
P2.2 AI1 Signal Range
P2.3 AI1 Custom min 0 100%
REVERSE 13:53 MENU FAVORITE 13:53 MENU
Right key Locked After 3s
STP FWD KEY PAR

P2.2
AI1 Signal Range
*Locked*
FAVORITE 13:53 MENU
T—Favorite
Favorites collect the user’s favorite parameters. User can
add one parameter into favorite list by “FAVORITE” soft key,
and can delete it from favorite list by “DELETE” soft key.
If a parameter has not been added into the favorite list, the
soft keys “FAVORITE” will be shown in parameter page (see
Figure 11 on Page 12). If it has been added into the favorite
list, the soft key “FAVORITE” will not be shown.
If a parameter has been added to the favorite list, it shall
appear in the favorite menu. Then when you enter into the
favorite menu, the soft keys “DELETE” will be shown. This
allows you to remove the selected parameter from favorite
list (see Figure 12 on Page 12).
After one parameter is removed from favorite list, the next
parameter in the favorite list will be selected by default.

Chapter 4—Startup
Chapter 4—Startup
Startup Wizard Page
The Startup Wizard is a sub-menu of main menu. Once user
enters into this menu, the Startup Wizard will begin.
In the Startup Wizard, you will be prompted for essential
information needed by the drive so that it can start
controlling your motor. During this process, you can also
select the application that best suits your needs.
The parameters in Startup Wizard shall be in the following
sequence: Language, Real Time Clock, Daylight Saving,
Application, Min Frequency, Max Frequency, Motor Nom
Current, Current Limit, Motor Nom Speed, Motor PF, Motor
Nom Volt, Motor Nom Frequency, Acc Time 1 and Dec Time
1, Local Control Place, Remote 1 Control Place, Local
Reference, Remote 1 Reference, Application Setup.
If user changes the Application, the drive and keypad will
reset.

Chapter 4—Startup
Startup Wizard Table 12. Startup Wizard Instructions, continued

In the Startup Wizard, you will be prompted for essential Item Description
information needed by the drive so that it can start 11 Motor PF Min: 0.30
controlling your process. In the Wizard, you will need Max: 1.0
the following keypad buttons:
12 Motor Nom Volt Min: 180 V
Up/Down buttons. Max: 690 V
Use these to change value. 13 Motor Nom Freq Min: 30.00 Hz
Max: 400.00 Hz
14 Accel Time 1 Min: 0.1 s
Max: 3000.0 s
15 Decel Time 1 Min: 0.1 s
Max: 3000.0 s
16 Local Control Place 0 = Keypad
1 = I/O terminal Start 1
OK button. 2 = I/O terminal 2
3 = Fieldbus
Confirm selection with this button, and enter into
next question. 17 Local Reference 0 = AI1
1 = AI2
2 = Slot A: AI1
Back/Reset button. 3 = Slot B: AI1
4 = AI1 Joystick
If this button was pressed at the first question, 5 = AI2 Joystick
the Startup Wizard will be cancelled. 6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
If this button is pressed in any step on the Startup
8 = Motor Pot
Wizard, the Startup Wizard will be cancelled. 9 = Max Frequency
Once you have connected power to your Eaton PowerXL 10 = AI1 + AI2
11 = AI1–AI2
DG1 frequency converter, and the Startup Wizard is enabled,
12 = AI2–AI1
follow these instructions to easily set up your drive. 13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
Table 12. Startup Wizard Instructions 15 = Min (AI1, AI2)
16 = PID1 Control Output
Item Description 18 Remote Control Place 0 = Keypad
1 Startup Wizard Press OK? 1 = I/O terminal Start 1
2 = I/O terminal 2
2 Language 0 = English 3 = Fieldbus
1 = ѝ᮷
2 = Deutsch 19 Remote Reference 0 = AI1
1 = AI2
3 Real Time Clock yy.mm.dd 2 = Slot A: AI1
hh:mm:ss 3 = Slot B: AI1
4 Daylight Saving 0 = Off 4 = AI1 Joystick
1 = EU 5 = AI2 Joystick
2 = US 6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
5 Application 0 = Standard 8 = Motor Pot
1 = Multi-Pump 9 = Max Frequency
2 = Multi-PID 10 = AI1 + AI2
3 = Multi-Purpose 11 = AI1–AI2
6 Min Frequency Min: 0.00Hz 12 = AI2–AI1
Max: Max Frequency 13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
7 Max Frequency Min: Min Frequency
15 = Min (AI1, AI2)
Max: 400.00Hz
8 Motor Nom Current Min: 0.1A
Max: 500.0A Now the Startup Wizard is done. It will not show again at the
next power up. If you want to reset it, please select it from
9 Current Limit Min: Ih*1/10 the main menu (“Startup Wizard”).
Max: Ih*2
10 Motor Nom Speed Min: Ih*1/10
Max: Ih*2

Chapter 4—Startup
Application Macro Mini-Wizard
Multi-Pump and Fan Control Mini-Wizard PID Mini-Wizard

Table 13. Multi-Pump and Fan Control The PID Mini-Wizard is activated in the Quick Setup menu.
This Wizard assumes that you are going to use the PID
Item Description controller in the “one feedback/one setpoint” mode. The
20 PID 1 Process Unit Select Units control place will be I/O A and the default process unit “%”.
The PID Mini-Wizard asks for the following values to be set:
21 PID1 Process Unit Min Min: –99999.99
Max: PID1 Process Unit Max Table 14. PID Mini-Wizard Values
22 PID1 Process Unit Max Min: Process Unit Min Item Description
Max: 99999.99
20 PID 1 Process Unit Select Units
23 PID 1 Set Point 1 Source Select Function
21 PID1 Process Unit Min Min: –99999.99
24 PID 1 Keypad Set Point 1 Min: PID 1 Process Unit Min Max: PID1 Process Unit Max
Max: PID 1 Process Unit Max
22 PID1 Process Unit Max Min: PID1 Process Unit Min
25 PID 1 Feedback 1 Source Select Input Max: 99999.99
26 PID 1 Feedback 1 Min Min: –200% 23 PID 1 Set Point 1 Source Select Function
Max: 200%
24 PID 1 Keypad Set Point 1 Min: PID 1 Process Unit Min
27 PID 1 Feedback 1 Max Min: –200% Max: PID 1 Process Unit Max
Max: 200%
25 PID 1 Feedback 1 Source Select Input
28 Number of Motors Min: 1
Max: 5 26 PID 1 Feedback 1 Min Min: –200%
Max: 200%
29 Bandwidth Min: 0%
Max: 100% 27 PID 1 Feedback 1 Max Min: –200%
Max: 200%
30 Bandwidth Delay Min: 0 s
Max: 3600 s
31 Interlock Enable 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

Chapter 5—Standard Application

Introduction ● Reference frequency limit supervision
The Standard Application is typically used in basic motor ● Power limit supervision
control scenarios where multiple pump control, PID loops, ● Analog input limit supervision
or advanced control loops are not required. It provides the
ability for the user to define its local and remote control and ● Auto restart
reference signals. In addition there is the ability to scale the
analog input and output signals to be read based off the
● Power loss ride through
desired motor response. There are also 8 digital inputs, ● Trend buffer
3 relay outputs, and 1 digital output that can be programmed
to allow for control schemes that require the drive to have
● Programmable switching frequency
certain functions. It provides full customization on the motor ● Multi-Preset speeds
control sequence with the ability to be in frequency or speed ● Emergency stop
control mode, and tuning of the V/Hz curve can be selected.
Drive/Motor protections can be customized to defined ● Line start lockout
actions for added user control. Below is a list of other ● Fan control
features that are available in the Standard Application.
● DC brake
Standard Application includes functions: ● Flux brake
● Selectable digital input function ● Dynamic brake
● Selectable digital output function ● Motor current limit supervision
● Reference filter, scaling, inversion, offset and range
I/O Controls
● Output signal filter, scaling, inversion, offset and range
● “Terminal To Function” (TTF) Programming
● Selectable analog output function
The design behind the programming of the digital inputs in
● Programmable start/stop and reverse signal logic the DG1 drive is to use “Terminal To Function”
● Two independent set of Acceleration/Deceleration ramps programming, which is composed of multiple functions that
get assigned a digital input to that function. The parameters
● S curves in the drive are set up with specific functions and by defining
the digital input and slot in some cases, depending on which
● Skip frequency options are available. For use of the drives control board
● Start source (Local/Remote control function) inputs, they will be referred to as DigIN:1 through DigIN:8.
When additional option cards are used, they will be defined
● Reference source as DigIN:X:IOY:Z. The X indicates the slot that the card is
● Flying start being installed in, which will be either A or B. The IOY
determines the type of card it is, which would be IO1 or IO5.
● Jog The Z indicates which input is being used on that available
option card.
● Volts per Hertz control
● “Function To Terminal” (FTT) Programming
● Real time clock function—RTC time display
The design behind the programming of the relay outputs
● Drive temperature limit supervision and digital output in the DG1 drive is to use “Function To
● Output frequency 1 limit supervision Terminal” programming. It is composed of a terminal, be it a
relay output or a digital output, that is assigned a parameter.
● Output frequency 2 limit supervision Within that parameter, it has different functions that can be set.
● Torque limit supervision The parameters of the Standard Application are explained
on Page 150 of this manual, “Description of Parameters.”
The explanations are arranged according to the parameter
number.

Control I/O Configuration

● Run 240 Vac and 24 Vdc control wiring in separate conduit
● Communication wire to be shielded
Table 15. I/O Connection
External Wiring Pin Signal Name Signal Default Setting Description

1 +10 V Ref. Output Voltage — 10 Vdc Supply Source
Res
2 AI1+ Analog Input 1 0–10 V Voltage Speed Reference (Programmable to 4 mA to 20 mA)

3 AI1– Analog Input 1 Ground — Analog Input 1 Common (Ground)
4 AI2+ Analog Input 2 4 mA to 20 mA Current Speed Reference (Programmable to 0–10 V)
i
6 GND I/O Signal Ground — I/O Ground for Reference and Control
7 DIN5 Digital Input 5 Preset Speed B0 Sets frequency output to Preset Speed 1
9 DIN7 Digital Input 7 Emergency Stop (TI–) Input forces VFD output to shut off
10 DIN8 Digital Input 8 Force Remote (TI+) Input takes VFD from Local to Remote
11 CMB DI5 to DI8 Common Grounded Allows source input
13 24 V +24 Vdc Output — Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
14 DO1 Digital Output 1 Ready Shows the drive is ready to run
15 24 Vo +24 Vdc Output — Control voltage output (100 mA max.)
17 AO1+ Analog Output 1 Output Frequency Shows Output frequency to motor 0–60 Hz (4 mA to 20 mA)
18 AO2+ Analog Output 2 Motor Current Shows Motor current of motor 0–FLA (4 mA to 20 mA)
19 24 Vi +24 Vdc Input — External control voltage input
20 DIN1 Digital Input 1 Run Forward Input starts drive in forward direction (start enable)
21 DIN2 Digital Input 2 Run Reverse Input starts drive in reverse direction (start enable)
22 DIN3 Digital Input 3 External Fault Input causes drive to fault
23 DIN4 Digital Input 4 Fault Reset Input resets active faults
24 CMA DI1 to DI4 Common Grounded Allows source input
25 A RS-485 Signal A — Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
26 B RS-485 Signal B — Fieldbus Communication (Modbus, BACnet)
27 R3NO Relay 3 Normally Open At Speed Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
28 R1NC Relay 1 Normally Closed Run Relay output 1 shows VFD is in a run state
29 R1CM Relay 1 Common
30 R1NO Relay 1 Normally Open
31 R3CM Relay 3 Common At Speed Relay output 3 shows VFD is at Ref. Frequency
32 R2NC Relay 2 Normally Closed Fault Relay output 2 shows VFD is in a fault state
Notes
The above wiring demonstrates a SINK configuration. It is important that CMA and CMB are wired to ground (as shown by dashed line). If a SOURCE configuration
is desired, wire 24 V to CMA and CMB and close the inputs to ground. When using the +10 V for AI1, it is important to wire AI1—to ground (as shown by dashed
line). If using +10 V for AI1 or AI2, terminals 3, 5, and 6 need to be jumpered together.

Table 16. Drive Communication Ports

Port Communication
RJ45 Keypad Port
Upload/Download Parameters USB to RJ45
Remote Mount Keypad Ethernet
Upgrade Drive Firmware USB to RJ45
RJ45 Ethernet Port
Upload/Download Parameters Ethernet
Ethernet IP Communications Ethernet
Modbus TCP Communications Ethernet
RS-485 Serial Port 1
Upload/Download Parameters Two-Wire Twisted Pair
Upgrade Drive Firmware Two-Wire Twisted Pair
Modbus RTU Communications Two-Wire Twisted Pair
BACnet MS/TP Communications Two-Wire Twisted Pair
1 Shielded wire recommended.

Standard Application—Parameters List

On the next pages you will find the lists of parameters within the respective parameter
groups. The parameter descriptions are given on Page 150, “Description of Parameters.”
The descriptions are arranged according to the parameter number.
Column explanations:
Code = Location indication on the keypad; shows the operator the present parameter number
Parameter = Name of parameter
Min = Minimum value of parameter
Max = Maximum value of parameter
Unit = Unit of parameter value; given if available
Default = Value preset by factory
ID = ID number of the parameter
Table 17. Monitor—M

Code Parameter Min. Max. Unit Default ID Note
M1 Output Frequency Hz 0.00 1
M2 Freq Reference Hz 0.00 24
M3 Motor Speed rpm 0 2
M4 Motor Current A 0.0 3
M5 Motor Torque % 0.0 4
M6 Motor Power % 0.0 5
M7 Motor Voltage V 0.0 6
M8 DC-link Voltage V 0 7
M9 Unit Temperature °C 0.0 8
M10 Motor Temperature % 0.0 9
M12 Analog Input 1 Varies 0.00 10
M14 Analog Output 1 Varies 0.00 25
M16 DI1, DI2, DI3 0 12
M17 DI4, DI5, DI6 0 13
M18 DI7, DI8 0 576
M19 DO1 0 14
M20 RO1, RO2, RO3 0 557
M41 PT100 Temperature °C 1000.0 27
M42 Last Active Fault 0 28 See Fault Codes on Page 223
in Appendix B
M43 RTC Battery Status 583 0 = Not Installed
1 = Installed
2 = Change Battery
3 = Over Voltage
M44 Instance Motor Power kW 0.000 1686
M45 Energy Savings Varies 0 2120
M46 Multi-Monitoring 1, 2, 3 30
Notes
1 Parameter value can only be changed after the drive has stopped.
2 Parameter value will be set to be default when changing macros.

Table 18. Operate Mode—O

O1 Output Frequency Hz 0.00 1
O2 Freq Reference Hz 0.00 24
O3 Motor Speed rpm 0 2
O4 Motor Current A 0.0 3
O5 Motor Torque % 0.0 4
O6 Motor Power % 0.0 5
O7 Motor Voltage V 0.0 6
O8 DC-link Voltage V 0 7
O9 Unit Temperature °C 0.0 8
O10 Motor Temperature % 0.0 9
R12 2 Keypad Reference Par. P1.1 Par. P1.2 Hz 0.00 141
Table 19. Basic Parameters—P1

P1.1 2 Min Frequency 0.00 Par. P1.2 Hz 0.00 101
P1.2 2 Max Frequency Par. P1.1 400.00 Hz 60.00 102
P1.3 2 Accel Time 1 0.1 3000.0 s 3.0 103
P1.4 2 Decel Time 1 0.1 3000.0 s 3.0 104
P1.5 1 Motor Nom Current Drive Nom Drive Nom A Drive Nom CT 486
CT*1/10 CT*2
P1.6 1 Motor Nom Speed 300 20000 rpm Motor Nom Speed 489
P1.7 1 Motor PF 0.30 1.00 0.85 490
P1.8 1 Motor Nom Voltage 180 690 V Motor Nom Voltage 487
P1.9 1 Motor Nom Frequency 8.00 400.00 Hz Motor Nom Freq 488
P1.10 2 Power Up Local Remote 0 1685 0 = Hold Last
Select 1 = Local Control
2 = Remote Control
P1.11 2 Remote1 Control Place 0 135 0 = I/O Terminal Start 1
1 = Fieldbus
2 = I/O Terminal 2
3 = Keypad
P1.12 2 Local Control Place 0 1695 0 = Keypad
1 = I/O Terminal Start 1
2 = I/O Terminal 2
3 = Fieldbus
Notes

Table 19. Basic Parameters—P1, continued

P1.13 12 Local Reference 6 136 0 = AI1
1 = AI2
2 = Slot A: AI1
3 = Slot B: AI1
4 = AI1 Joystick
5 = AI2 Joystick
6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
9 = Max Frequency
10 = AI1 + AI2
11 = AI1–AI2
12 = AI2–AI1
13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
15 = Min (AI1, AI2)
16 = MAX(AI1,AI2)
P1.14 12 Remote1 Reference 1 137 See P1.13
P1.15 1 Reverse Enable 1 1679 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Table 20. Analog Input—P2

P2.1 AI1 Mode 1 222 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
P2.2 2 AI1 Signal Range 0 175 0 = 0–100% / 0–20 mA / 0–10 V
1 = 20–100% / 4–20 mA / 2–10 V
2 = Customized
P2.3 2 AI1 Custom Min 0.00 Par. P2.4 % 0.00 176
P2.4 2 AI1 Custom Max Par. P2.3 100.00 % 100.00 177
P2.5 2 AI1 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 0.10 174
P2.6 2 AI1 Signal Invert 0 181 0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
P2.7 2 AI1 Joystick Hyst 0.00 20.00 % 0.00 178
P2.8 2 AI1 Sleep Limit 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 179
P2.9 2 AI1 Sleep Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 180
P2.10 2 AI1 Joystick Offset –50.00 50.00 % 0.00 133
P2.11 AI2 Mode 0 223 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
2 = –10 to +10 V
P2.12 2 AI2 Signal Range 1 183 0 = 0–100% / 0–20 mA /
0 to 10 V / –10 to 10 V
1 = 20–100% / 4–20 mA /
2 to 10 V / –6 to 10 V
2 = Customized
P2.15 2 AI2 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 0.10 182
P2.16 2 AI2 Signal Invert 0 189 See P2.6
P2.18 2 AI2 Sleep Limit 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 187
P2.19 2 AI2 Sleep Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 188
Notes

Table 20. Analog Input—P2, continued

P2.21 2 AI Ref Scale Min Value 0.00 Par. P2.22 Hz 0.00 144
P2.22 2 AI Ref Scale Max Value Par. P2.21 400.00 Hz 0.00 145
Table 21. Digital Input—P3

P3.1 12 Start/Stop Logic 0 143 0 = Forward–Reverse
1 = Start–Reverse
2 = Start–Enable
3 = Start Pulse–Stop Pulse
P3.2 2 Start Signal 1 2 190 0 = DigIN:ForceOpen
1 = DigIN:ForceClose
2 = DigIN: 1
3 = DigIN: 2
4 = DigIN: 3
5 = DigIN: 4
6 = DigIN: 5
7 = DigIN: 6
8 = DigIN: 7
9 = DigIN: 8
10 = DigIN: A: IO1: 1
11 = DigIN: A: IO1: 2
12 = DigIN: A: IO1: 3
13 = DigIN: A: IO5: 1
14 = DigIN: A: IO5: 2
15 = DigIN: A: IO5: 3
16 = DigIN: A: IO5: 4
17 = DigIN: A: IO5: 5
18 = DigIN: A: IO5: 6
19 = DigIN: B: IO1: 1
20 = DigIN: B: IO1: 2
21 = DigIN: B: IO1: 3
22 = DigIN: B: IO5: 1
23 = DigIN: B: IO5: 2
24 = DigIN: B: IO5: 3
25 = DigIN: B: IO5: 4
26 = DigIN: B: IO5: 5
27 = DigIN: B: IO5: 6
28 = Time Channel 1
29 = Time Channel 2
30 = Time Channel 3
P3.3 2 Start Signal 2 3 191 See P3.2
P3.4 12 Thermistor Input Select 0 881 0 = Digital Input
1 = Thermistor Input
P3.5 2 Reverse 0 198 See P3.2
P3.6 2 Ext. Fault 1 NO 4 192 See P3.2
P3.7 2 Ext. Fault 1 NC 1 193 See P3.2
P3.8 2 Fault Reset 5 200 See P3.2
P3.9 2 Run Enable 1 194 See P3.2
P3.10 2 Preset Speed B0 6 205 See P3.2
P3.15 2 Accel/Decel Time Set 0 195 See P3.2
Notes

Table 21. Digital Input—P3, continued

P3.16 2 Accel/Decel Prohibit 0 201 See P3.2
P3.17 2 No Access To Param 0 215 See P3.2
P3.21 2 Remote Control 9 196 See P3.2
P3.22 2 Local Control 0 197 See P3.2
P3.23 2 Remote1/2 Select 0 209 See P3.2
P3.26 2 DC Brake Enable 0 202 See P3.2
P3.32 2 Jog Enable 0 199 See P3.2
P3.36 2 AI Ref Source Select 0 208 See P3.2
P3.42 2 Emergency Stop 1 747 See P3.2
P3.45 12 2nd Start Stop Logic 0 2206 See P3.1
P3.46 2 2nd Start Signal 1 2 2207 See P3.2
P3.52 2 Ext. Fault 1 Text 0 2297 0 = External Fault
1 = Vibration Cut out
2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
6 = Damper Interlock
7 = Run Enable
8 = Freeze Stat Trip
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
P3.55 2 Parameter Set1/2 Sel 0 2312 See P3.2
Notes

Table 22. Analog Output—P4

P4.1 2 AO1 Mode 0 227 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
P4.2 2 AO1 Function 1 146 0 = Not Used
1 = Output Frequency
2 = Freq Reference
3 = Motor Speed
4 = Motor Current
5 = Motor Torque (0–Nom)
6 = Motor Power
7 = Motor Voltage
8 = DC-Bus Voltage
19 = AI1
20 = AI2
21 = Output Freq (–2 to +2N)
22 = Motor Torque (–2 to +2N)
23 = Motor Power (–2 to +2N)
24 = PT100 Temperature
25 = FB Data Input 1
P4.3 2 AO1 Minimum 1 149 0 = 0 V / 0 mA
1 = 2 V / 4 mA
P4.4 2 AO1 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 1.00 147
P4.5 2 AO1 Scale 10 1000 % 100 150
P4.6 2 AO1 Inversion 0 148 0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
P4.7 2 AO1 Offset –100.00 100.00 % 0.00 173
P4.8 2 AO2 Mode 0 228 See P4.1
P4.9 2 AO2 Function 4 229 See P4.2
P4.10 2 AO2 Minimum 1 232 See P4.3
P4.11 2 AO2 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 1.00 230
P4.12 2 AO2 Scale 10 1000 % 100 233
P4.13 2 AO2 Inversion 0 231 See P4.6
P4.14 2 AO2 Offset –100.00 100.00 % 0.00 234
Notes

Table 23. Digital Output—P5

P5.1 2 DO1 Function 1 151 0 = Not Used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault Invert
5 = Warning
6 = Reversed
7 = At Speed
8 = Zero Frequency
9 = Freq Limit 1 Superv
13 = Overheat Fault
14 = Overcurrent Regular
15 = Overvoltage Regular
16 = Undervoltage Regular
17 = 4 mA Ref Fault/Warning
20 = Torq Limit Superv
21 = Ref Limit Superv
22 = Control from I/O
23 = Un-Requested Rotation
Direction
24 = Thermistor Fault Output
27 = Ext Fault/Warning
28 = Remote Control
29 = Jog Speed Select
30 = Motor Therm Protection
31 = FB Digital Input 1
36 = TC1 Status
37 = TC2 Status
38 = TC3 Status
39 = In E-Stop
40 = Power Limit Superv
41 = Temp Limit Superv
42 = Analog Input Superv
51 = Motor Current 1 Supv
53 = Second AI Limit Supv
54 = DC Charge Switch Close
55 = Preheat Active
56 = Cold Weather Active
P5.2 2 RO1 Function 2 152 See P5.1
P5.5 2 Freq Limit 1 Supv 0 154 0 = No Limit
1 = Low Limit Superv
2 = High Limit Superv
P5.6 2 Freq Limit 1 Supv Val 0.00 Par. P1.2 Hz 0.00 155
P5.9 2 Torque Limit Supv 0 159 0 = No Limit
P5.10 2 Torque Limit Supv Val –1000.0 1000.0 % 100.0 160
Notes

Table 23. Digital Output—P5, continued

P5.11 2 Ref Limit Supv 0 161 0 = No Limit
P5.12 2 Ref Limit Supv Val 0.00 Par. P1.2 Hz 0.00 162
P5.15 2 Temp Limit Supv 0 165 See P5.11
P5.16 2 Temp Limit Supv Val –10.0 75.0 °C 40.0 166
P5.17 2 Power Limit Supv 0 167 See P5.11
P5.18 2 Power Limit Supv Val 0.0 200.0 % 0.0 168
P5.19 2 AI Supv Select 0 170 0 = AI1
1 = AI2
P5.20 2 AI Limit Supv 0 171 See P5.11
P5.21 2 AI Limit Supv Val 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 172
P5.30 RO1 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2111
P5.31 RO1 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2112
P5.32 RO2 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2113
P5.33 RO2 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2114
P5.34 RO3 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2115
P5.35 RO3 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2116
P5.36 RO3 Reverse 0 2117 0 = No
1 = Yes
P5.37 2 Motor Current 1 Supv 0 2189 0 = No Limit
P5.38 2 Motor Current 1 Supv Value 0 DCI_uwDrive A DCI_uwDrive 2190
NomCurrCT*2 NomCurrCT
P5.41 2 Second AI Supv Select 0 2193 0 = AI1
1 = AI2
P5.42 2 Second AI Limit Supv 0 2194 See P5.11
P5.43 2 Second AI Limit Supv Val 0 100 % 0 2195
P5.44 2 Motor Current 1 Supv Hyst 0.1 1 A 0.1 2196
P5.46 2 AI Supv Hyst 1 10 % 1 2198
P5.47 2 Second AI Supv Hyst 1 10 % 1 2199
P5.48 2 Freq Limit 1 Supv Hyst 0.1 1 Hz 0.1 2200
P5.50 2 Torque Limit Supv Hyst 1 5 % 1 2202
P5.51 2 Ref Limit Supv Hyst 0.1 1 Hz 0.1 2203
P5.52 2 Temp Limit Supv Hyst 1 10 ? 1 2204
P5.53 2 Power Limit Supv Hyst 0.1 10 % 0.1 2205
Notes

Table 24. Drive Control—P7

P7.1 2 Remote 2 Control Place 1 138 See P1.11
P7.2 12 Remote 2 Reference 7 139 See P1.13
P7.3 2 Keypad Reference Par. P1.1 Par. P1.2 Hz 0.00 141
P7.4 2 Keypad Direction 0 116 0 = Forward
1 = Reverse
P7.5 2 Keypad Stop 1 114 0 = Enabled-Keypad Operation
1 = Always Enabled
P7.6 2 Jog Reference Par. P1.1 Par. P1.2 Hz 0.00 117
P7.9 2 Start Mode 0 252 0 = Ramp
1 = Flying Start
P7.10 2 Stop Mode 1 253 0 = Coasting
1 = Ramp
P7.11 2 Ramp 1 Shape 0.0 10.0 s 0.0 247
P7.12 2 Ramp 2 Shape 0.0 10.0 s 0.0 248
P7.13 2 Accel Time 2 0.1 3000.0 s 10.0 249
P7.14 2 Decel Time 2 0.1 3000.0 s 10.0 250
P7.15 2 Skip F1 Low Limit 0.00 Par. P7.16 Hz 0.00 256
P7.16 2 Skip F1 High Limit Par. P7.15 400.00 Hz 0.00 257
P7.21 2 Prohibit Accel/Decel Ramp 0.1 10.0 1.0 264
P7.22 2 Power Loss Function 0 267 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P7.23 2 Power Loss Time 0.3 5.0 s 2.0 268
P7.24 Currency $ 2121 0=$
1 = GBP
2 = Eur
3 = JPY
4 = Rs
5 = R$
6 = Fr
7 = Kr
P7.25 Energy Cost Varies 0 2122
P7.26 Data Type 0 2123 0 = Cumulative
1 = Daily Avg
2 = Weekly Avg
3 = Monthly Avg
4 = Yearly Avg
P7.27 Energy Savings Reset 0 2124 0 = No Action
1 = Reset
Notes

Table 25. Motor Control—P8

P8.1 12 Motor Control Mode 0 287 0 = Freq Control
1 = Speed Control
P8.2 1 Current Limit Drive Nom Drive Nom A Drive Nom VT 107
CT*1/10 CT*2
P8.3 12 V/Hz Optimization 0 109 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.4 12 V/Hz Ratio 0 108 0 = Linear
1 = Squared
2 = Programmable
3 = Linear + Flux Optimization
P8.5 12 Field Weakening Point 8.00 400.00 Hz 60.00 289
P8.6 12 Voltage at FWP 10.00 200.00 % 100.00 290
P8.7 12 V/Hz Mid Frequency 0.00 Par. P8.5 Hz V/Hz Midpoint Freq 291
P8.8 12 V/Hz Mid Voltage 0.00 100.00 % 100.00 292
P8.9 12 Zero Frequency Voltage 0.00 40.00 % 0.00 293
P8.10 2 Switching Frequency Min Switching Max Switching kHz Default Switching 288
Freq Freq Freq CT
P8.11 2 Sine Filter Enable 0 1665 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.12 12 Overvoltage Control 1 294 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P8.17 2 Frequency Ramp Out 0 3000 ms 0 1585
FilterTime Constant
P8.39 2 Start Boost Rise Time –1 32000 s 0 1622
Table 26. Protections—P9

P9.1 12 4 mA Input Fault 0 306 0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Warning: Previous Freq
3 = Warning: Preset Freq
4 = Fault
5 = Fault, Coast
P9.2 12 4 mA Fault Frequency 0.00 Par. P1.2 Hz 0.00 331
P9.3 12 External Fault 2 307 See P9.11
P9.4 12 Input Phase Fault 2 332 See P9.11
P9.5 12 Uvolt Fault Response 2 330 See P9.11
P9.6 12 Output Phase Fault 2 308 See P9.11
P9.7 12 Ground Fault 2 309 See P9.11
P9.8 12 Motor Thermal Protection 2 310 See P9.11
P9.9 2 Motor Thermal F0 Current 0.0 150.0 % 40.0 311
P9.10 2 Motor Thermal Time 1 200 min 12 312
P9.11 12 Stall Protection 0 313 0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast
P9.12 2 Stall Current Limit 0.1 Active Motor A Active Motor Nom 314
Nom I*2 I*13/10
P9.13 2 Stall Time Limit 1.0 120.0 s 15.0 315
Notes

Table 26. Protections—P9, continued

P9.14 2 Stall Frequency Limit 1.00 Par. P1.2 Hz 25.00 316
P9.15 12 Underload Protection 0 317 See P9.11
P9.16 2 Underload Fnom Torque 10.0 150.0 % 50.0 318
P9.17 2 Underload F0 Torque 5.0 150.0 % 10.0 319
P9.18 2 Underload Time Limit 2.00 600.00 s 20.00 320
P9.19 12 Thermistor Fault Response 2 333 See P9.11
P9.20 2 Line Start Lockout 2 750 0 = Disabled, No Change
1 = Enable, No Change
2 = Disabled, Changed
3 = Enable, Changed
P9.21 12 Fieldbus Fault Response 2 334 See P9.11
P9.22 12 OPTCard Fault Response 2 335 See P9.11
P9.23 12 Unit Under Temp Prot 2 1564 See P9.11
P9.24 2 Wait Time 0.10 10.00 s 0.50 321
P9.25 2 Trail Time 0.00 60.00 s 30.00 322
P9.26 2 Start Function 0 323 0 = Flying Start
P9.27 2 Undervoltage Attempts 0 10 1 324
P9.28 2 Overvoltage Attempts 0 10 1 325
P9.29 2 Overcurrent Attempts 0 3 1 326
P9.30 2 4 mA Fault Attempts 0 10 1 327
P9.31 2 Motor Temp Fault Attempts 0 10 1 329
P9.32 2 External Fault Attempts 0 10 0 328
P9.33 2 Underload Attempts 0 10 1 336
P9.34 12 RTC Fault 1 955 See P9.11
P9.35 12 PT100 Fault Response 2 337 See P9.11
P9.36 12 Replace Battery Fault 1 1256 See P9.11
Response
P9.37 12 Replace Fan Fault Response 1 1257 See P9.11
P9.38 12 IP Address Confliction Resp 1 1678 See P9.11
P9.39 Cold Weather Mode 0 2126 0 = No
1 = Yes
P9.40 Cold Weather Voltage Level 0 20 % 2 2127
P9.41 Cold Weather Time Out 0 10 min 3 2128
P9.44 2 Ground Fault Limit 0 30 % 15 2158
P9.45 12 Keypad Comm Fault 2 2157 See P9.11
Response
P9.46 2 Preheat Mode 0 2159 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P9.47 2 Preheat Temp Source 0 2160 0 = Drive Temperature
P9.48 2 Preheat Enter Temp 0.0 19.9 °C 10.0 2161
P9.49 2 Preheat Quit Temp 20.0 40.0 °C 20.0 2162
P9.50 2 Preheat Output Voltage 0.0 20.0 % 2.0 2163
Notes

Table 27. Preset Speed—P12

P12.1 2 Preset Speed 1 0.00 Par. P1.2 Hz 5.00 105
Table 28. Brake—P14

P14.1 12 DC-Brake Current Drive Nom Drive Nom A Drive Nom 254
CT*15/100 CT*15/10 CT*1/2
P14.2 12 Start DC-Brake Time 0.00 600.00 s 0.00 263
P14.3 12 Stop DC-Brake Frequency 0.10 10.00 Hz 1.50 262
P14.4 12 Stop DC-Brake Time 0.00 600.00 s 0.00 255
P14.5 12 Brake Chopper 0 251 0 = Disabled
1 = B(Run) T(Rdy)
2 = External
3 = B(Rdy) T(Rdy)
4 = B(Run) T(No)
P14.6 12 Flux Brake 0 266 0 = Off
1 = On
P14.7 12 Flux Brake Current Active Motor Par. P8.2 A Active Motor 265
Nom I*1/10 Nom I*1/2
Table 29. FB Data Output Sel—P20.1

P20.1.1 2 FB Data Output 1 Sel 1 1556
Table 30. Modbus RTU—P20.2

P20.2.1 RS485 Comm Set 0 586 0 = Modbus RTU
1 = BACnet MS/TP
2 = SmartWire-DT
P20.2.2 Slave Address 1 247 1 587
P20.2.3 Baud Rate 1 584 0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 57600
4 = 115200
Notes

Table 30. Modbus RTU—P20.2, continued

P20.2.4 Parity Type 2 585 0 = None
1 = Odd
2 = Even
P20.2.5 Modbus RTU Protocol 0 588 0 = Initial
Status 1 = Stopped
2 = Operational
3 = Faulted
P20.2.6 Slave Busy 0 589 0 = Not Busy
1 = Busy
P20.2.7 Parity Error 0 590
P20.2.8 Slave Fault 0 591
P20.2.9 Last Fault Response 0 592
P20.2.10 Comm Timeout Modbus RTU ms 10000 593
Table 31. BACnet MS/TP—P20.2

P20.2.11 BACnet Baud Rate 2 594 0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 76800
4 = 115200
P20.2.12 BACnet MS/TP Device 0 127 1 595
Address
P20.2.13 BACnet Instance Number 0 4194302 0 596
P20.2.14 BACnet Comm Timeout ms 6000 598
P20.2.15 BACnet Protocol Status 0 599 0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
P20.2.16 BACnet Fault Code 0 600 0 = None
1 = Sole Master
2 = Duplicate MAC ID
3 = Baud Rate Fault
Table 32. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3

P20.3.1 IP Address Mode 1 1500 0 = Static IP
1 = DHCP with AutoIP
P20.3.2 Active IP Address 1507
P20.3.3 Active Subnet Mask 1509
P20.3.4 Active Default Gateway 1511
P20.3.5 MAC Address 1513
P20.3.6 Static IP Address 192.168.1.254 1501
P20.3.7 Static Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 1503
P20.3.8 Static Default Gateway 192.168.1.1 1505
P20.3.9 EtherNet/IP Protocol Status 0 608 0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
P20.3.10 Connection Limit 5 609
P20.3.11 Modbus TCP Unit ID 1 610
Notes

Table 32. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3, continued

P20.3.12 Comm Timeout Modbus TCP ms 10000 611
P20.3.13 Modbus TCP Protocol Status 0 612 0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Busy
P20.3.15 Modbus TCP Parity Error 0 614
Table 33. SmartWire-DT—P20.4

P20.4.1 Protocol Status 0 2139
P20.4.2 Baud Rate 0 2141 0 = 125 kBaud
1 = 250 kBaud
Table 34. Basic Setting—P21.1

P21.1.1 Language 0 340 0 = English
1 = Depends upon Language Pack
P21.1.2 1 Application 0 142 0 = Standard
1 = Multi-Pump
2 = Multi-PID
3 = Multi-Purpose
P21.1.3 Parameter Sets 0 619 0 = No
1 = Reload Defaults
2 = Reload Set 1
3 = Reload Set 2
4 = Store Set 1
5 = Store Set 2
6 = Reset
7 = Reload Defaults VM
P21.1.4 Up To Keypad 0 620 0 = No
1 = Yes
P21.1.5 Down From Keypad 0 621 0 = No
1 = All Parameters
2 = All, No Motor
3 = App Parameters
P21.1.6 Parameter Comparison 0 623 0 = No
1 = Compare with Keypad
2 = Compare with Default
3 = Compare with Set 1
P21.1.7 Password 0 9999 0 624
P21.1.8 Parameter Lock 0 625 0 = Change Enable
1 = Change Disable
P21.1.9 Multimonitor Set 0 627 See P21.1.8
Notes

Table 34. Basic Setting—P21.1, continued

P21.1.10 Default Page 0 628 0 = None
1 = Main Menu
2 = Multi-Monitor
3 = Favorite Menu
P21.1.11 Timeout Time 0 65535 s 30 629
P21.1.12 Contrast Adjust 5 18 12 630
P21.1.13 Backlight Time 1 65535 min 10 631
P21.1.14 Fan Control 2 632 0 = Continuous
1 = Temperature
2 = Run Follow
3 = Calculate Temp
P21.1.15 HMI ACK Timeout 200 5000 ms 200 633
P21.1.16 HMI Retry Number 1 10 5 634
Table 35. Version Info—P21.2

P21.2.1 Keypad Software Version 640
P21.2.2 Motor Control Software 642
Version
P21.2.3 Application Software App Firmware 644
Version
Table 36. Application Info—P21.3

P21.3.1 Brake Chopper Stat 646 0 = No
1 = Yes
P21.3.2 Brake Resistor 647 See P21.3.1
P21.3.3 Serial Number 648
Table 37. User Info—P21.4

P21.4.1 Real Time Clock 0.0.0.1:1:13 566
P21.4.2 Daylight Saving 0 582 0 = Off
1 = EU
2 = US
P21.4.3 Total MWh Count Mwh 601
P21.4.4 Total Power Day Count 603
P21.4.5 Total Power Hr Count 606
P21.4.6 Trip MWh Count Mwh 604
P21.4.7 Clear Trip MWh Count 0 635 0 = Not Reset
1 = Reset
P21.4.8 Trip Power Day Count 636
P21.4.9 Trip Power Hr Count 637
P21.4.10 Clear Trip Power Count 0 639 See P21.4.7
Notes

Chapter 6—Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application

Introduction I/O Controls
The Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application is designed to ● “Terminal To Function” (TTF) Programming
be used in applications where multiple pumps or fan systems
are used to maintain a desired flow rate, pressure, or The design behind the programming of the digital inputs in
temperature value. It gives the ability to use a single PID loop the DG1 drive is to use “Terminal To Function”
to control one drive and have auxiliary motors connected via programming, which is composed of multiple functions that
drives or contactors start and stop based off the desired get assigned a digital input to that function. The parameters
process. It also gives the ability to use a single PID loop in the drive are set up with specific functions and by defining
and operate using a multi-master/lead-lag scheme using up the digital input and slot in some cases, depending on which
to 5 drives. It also provides the ability to auto-change options are available. For use of the drives control board
between the multiple motors to keep run times equal. inputs, they will be referred to as DigIN:1 through DigIN:8.
Controlwise it allows for 2 control and reference place When additional option cards are used, they will be defined
selections with 8 digital inputs and 2 analog inputs that are as DigIN:X:IOY:Z. The X indicates the slot that the card is
programmable. For monitoring the system and turning on being installed in, which will be either A or B. The IOY
aux motors, there are 3 programmable relay outputs, 1 digital determines the type of card it is, which would be IO1 or IO5.
output, and 2 sets of analog outputs that are programmable. The Z indicates which input is being used on that available
The application allows for full customization of the motor option card.
control scheme with frequency or speed control along with ● “Function To Terminal” (FTT) Programming
customizing the V/Hz curve. Drive/Motor protections can be
customized to defined actions. Below is a list of other The design behind the programming of the relay outputs
features in addition to the Standard Application features that and digital output in the DG1 drive is to use “Function To
are available in the Multi-Pump and Fan Control Application. Terminal” programming. It is composed of a terminal, be it a
Select the Multi-Pump and Fan Application in menu P21.1.2. Within that parameter, it has different functions that can be set.
Multi-Pump and Fan includes all the functions in Standard The parameters of the Multi-Pump and Fan Control
Application and Additional functions: Application are explained on Page 150 of this manual,
● Damper control “Description of Parameters.” The explanations are arranged
according to the parameter
● Fire mode
● Smoke purge mode
● Interlock for motors
● Multi-Pump control
● Auto change function
● Bypass
● Real time clock function—Timer
● Real time clock function—Interval
● PM setback
● Two independent set of motor Parameter
● PID
● Multi-Master/Lead-Lag

Control Examples
Single Drive
Figure 27. Example of Two-Pump Autochange, Main Diagram

Figure 28. Two-Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram

230 Vac Mains
29 DG1 Control Board 33

24 Vdc
RO1 RO2
13 21 DIN2 DIN3 22
30 34
Autom. 0 Line Autom. 0 Line

S1 S2
K2 K1
K2 K1
K1.1 K1 K2.1 K2
K1 K1.1 K2 K2.1
M1/DG1 M1/Line M2/DG1 M2/Line

Figure 29. Example of Three-Pump Autochange, Main Diagram
FY F3
Figure 30. Three-Pump Autochange System Principal Control Diagram

230 Vac
DG1 CB DG1 CB DG1 CB
24 Vdc DIN3 DIN4
13 21 DIN2 22 23
29 DG1 33 DG1 31
CB CB
30 34 27
A O Line A O Line A O Line

S1 S2 S3
K3 K3 K1
K2 K3 K1 K3 K2 K1
K2 K1 K2
K1.1 K1 K2.1 K2 K3.1 K3
K1 K1.1 K2 K2.1 K3 K3.1
M1/DG1 M1/Line M2/DG1 M2/Line M3/DG1 M3/Line

Figure 31. Example of the Function of the PFC Application with Three Auxiliary Drives
On
Interlock 4
Off
On
Interlock 3 Off
Interlocks On
Interlock 2 5 7
Off
On
Interlock 1
Off
On
Aux. 3 Running
Off
On Aux. 2 Running
Relay Off
Control On Aux. 1 Running
Off
On Main Drive Running
Off
Max. Frequency
2 4 6 8
Aux. 1, 2 and 3
Start Frequency
Main Drive
Output
Frequency
Aux. 1, 2 and 3 3
Stop Frequency
1
Min. Frequency
f
8
100%
Main
Drive
Aux.
Drive M.
2 4 Aux. Drive 2
D.
PID Output
5
Aux. Drive 3
2
Aux. Drive 1
1
t

Figure 32. Multi Pump Control Curve
Figure 33. Multi-Drive / Multi-Pump Layout

Figure 34. PowerXL Drives with 10 V Supply with a 0–10 V Transducer
Figure 35. PowerXL Drives with 10 V Supply with a 4–20 mA Transducer
Figure 36. PowerXL Drives with Ext Supply with a 4–20 mA Transducer

Figure 37. Bandwidth Feedback
1. Feedback out of bandwidth, output frequency over 5. Feedback out of bandwidth, output frequency below
staging frequency, start delay counter; delay times out, de-staging frequency, start delay counter; delay times
and interlock 2 is ok, add aux 1 motor by closing its out, remove aux 2 motor first because it’s the last one
corresponding relay. which been added.
2. As above, add aux 2 motor. 6. As above, remove aux 3 motor.
3. Aux 2’s interlock lost, add aux 3 as backup immediately. 7. As above, remove aux 1 motor.
4. Add aux 2 motor again since its interlock resumed.


Table 38. Multi-Pump and Fan Application Default I/O Connection

Res

i
Notes


Port Communication
RJ45 Keypad Port
RJ45 Ethernet Port
1
RS-485 Serial Port

Pump and Fan Application—Parameters List


M16 DI1, DI2, DI3 0 12
M17 DI4, DI5, DI6 0 13
M18 DI7, DI8 0 576
M19 DO1 0 14
M20 RO1, RO2, RO3 0 557
M21 TC1, TC2, TC3 0 558
M22 Interval 1 0 559 0 = Inactive
1 = Active
M23 Interval 2 0 560 See M22
M27 Timer 1 s 0 569
M28 Timer 2 s 0 571
M29 Timer 3 s 0 573
M30 PID1 Set Point Varies 0.00 16
M31 PID1 Feedback Varies 0.00 18
M32 PID1 Error Value Varies 0.00 20
M33 PID1 Output % 0.00 22

Table 40. Monitor—M, continued

M34 PID1 Status 0 23 0 = Stopped
1 = Running
2 = Sleep Mode
M40 Running Motors 0 26
in Appendix B
1 = Installed
2 = Change Battery
3 = Over Voltage
M45 Energy Savings Varies 2120

R13 2 PID1 Keypad Set Point 1 Par. P10.5 Par. P10.6 Varies 0 1307

P1.3 2 Accel Time 1 0.1 3000.0 s 3.0 103
P1.4 2 Decel Time 1 0.1 3000.0 s 3.0 104
CT*1/10 CT*2
P1.7 1 Motor PF 0.30 1.00 0.85 490
P1.8 1 Motor Nom Voltage 180 690 V Motor Nom Volt 487
2 = Remote Control
Notes


1 = Fieldbus
2 = I/O Terminal 2
3 = Keypad
P1.12 Local Control Place 0 1695 0 = Keypad
2 = I/O Terminal 2
3 = Fieldbus
1 = AI2
2 = Slot A: AI1
3 = Slot B: AI1
4 = AI1 Joystick
5 = AI2 Joystick
6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
9 = Max Frequency
10 = AI1 + AI2
11 = AI1–AI2
12 = AI2–AI1
13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
15 = Min (AI1, AI2)
16 = MAX(AI1,AI2)
17 = PID Control Output
1 = Enabled

P2.1 AI1 Mode 1 222 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
1 = 20–100% / 4–20 mA / 2–10 V
2 = Customized
P2.5 2 AI1 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 0.10 174
1 = Inverted
P2.8 2 AI1 Sleep Limit 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 179
P2.9 2 AI1 Sleep Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 180
P2.11 AI2 Mode 0 223 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
2 = –10 to +10 V
0 to 10 V / –10 to 10 V
1 = 20–100% / 4–20 mA /
2 to 10 V / –6 to 10 V
2 = Customized
Notes


P2.15 2 AI2 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 0.10 182
P2.18 2 AI2 Sleep Limit 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 187
P2.19 2 AI2 Sleep Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 188

1 = Start–Reverse
2 = Start–Enable
2 = DigIN: 1
3 = DigIN: 2
4 = DigIN: 3
5 = DigIN: 4
6 = DigIN: 5
7 = DigIN: 6
8 = DigIN: 7
9 = DigIN: 8
10 = DigIN: A: IO1: 1
11 = DigIN: A: IO1: 2
12 = DigIN: A: IO1: 3
13 = DigIN: A: IO5: 1
14 = DigIN: A: IO5: 2
15 = DigIN: A: IO5: 3
16 = DigIN: A: IO5: 4
17 = DigIN: A: IO5: 5
18 = DigIN: A: IO5: 6
19 = DigIN: B: IO1: 1
20 = DigIN: B: IO1: 2
21 = DigIN: B: IO1: 3
22 = DigIN: B: IO5: 1
23 = DigIN: B: IO5: 2
24 = DigIN: B: IO5: 3
25 = DigIN: B: IO5: 4
26 = DigIN: B: IO5: 5
27 = DigIN: B: IO5: 6
28 = Time Channel 1
29 = Time Channel 2
30 = Time Channel 3
Notes


P3.13 2 PID1 Control Enable 1 550 See P3.2
P3.24 2 Second Motor Para Select 0 217 See P3.2
P3.25 2 Bypass Start 0 218 See P3.2
P3.27 2 Smoke Mode 0 219 See P3.2
P3.28 2 Fire Mode 0 220 See P3.2
P3.29 2 Fire Mode Ref Select 0 221 See P3.2
P3.30 2 PID1 Set Point Select 0 351 See P3.2
P3.33 2 Start Timer 1 0 224 See P3.2
P3.37 2 Motor Interlock 1 0 210 See P3.2
P3.41 2 Motor Interlock 5 214 See P3.2
P3.43 2 Bypass Overload 0 1246 See P3.2
P3.44 Fire Mode Reverse 0 2118 See P3.2
Notes


2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
Notes


P4.1 2 AO1 Mode 0 227 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
2 = Freq Reference
3 = Motor Speed
4 = Motor Current
6 = Motor Power
7 = Motor Voltage
8 = DC-Bus Voltage
9 = PID1 Setpoint
10 = PID1 Feedback 1
12 = PID1 Control Error Value
19 = AI1
20 = AI2
P4.3 2 AO1 Minimum 1 149 0 = 0 V / 0 mA
1 = 2 V / 4 mA
P4.4 2 AO1 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 1.00 147
P4.5 2 AO1 Scale 10 1000 % 100 150
1 = Inverted
P4.7 2 AO1 Offset –100.00 100.00 % 0.00 173
P4.8 2 AO2 Mode 0 228 See P4.1
P4.11 2 AO2 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 1.00 230
P4.12 2 AO2 Scale 10 1000 % 100 233
P4.14 2 AO2 Offset –100.00 100.00 % 0.00 234
Notes


1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault Invert
5 = Warning
6 = Reversed
7 = At Speed
8 = Zero Frequency
11 = PID1 Superv
13 = Overheat Fault
Direction
25 = Fire Mode
26 = In Bypass Mode
28 = Remote Control
35 = Damper Control
36 = TC1 Status
37 = TC2 Status
38 = TC3 Status
39 = In E-Stop
43 = Motor 1 Control
49 = PID1 Sleep
55 = Preheat Active
Notes


1 = AI2
P5.22 2 PID1 Superv Enable 0 1346 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P5.23 2 PID1 Superv Upper Limit Par. P10.5 Par. P10.6 Varies 0.00 1347
P5.24 2 PID1 Superv Lower Limit Par. P10.5 Par. P10.6 Varies 0.00 1349
P5.25 2 PID1 Superv Delay 0 3000 s 0 1351
P5.30 RO1 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2111
P5.31 RO1 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2112
P5.32 RO2 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2113
P5.33 RO2 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2114
P5.34 RO3 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2115
P5.35 RO3 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2116
P5.36 RO3 Reverse 0 2117 0 = No
1 = Yes
1 = AI2
Notes


P5.46 2 AI Supv Hyst 1 10 % 1 2198
P5.52 2 Temp Limit Supv Hyst 1 10 deg C 1 2204

1 = Reverse
1 = Always Enabled
1 = Flying Start
1 = Ramp
P7.11 2 Ramp 1 Shape 0.0 10.0 s 0.0 247
P7.12 2 Ramp 2 Shape 0.0 10.0 s 0.0 248
P7.13 2 Accel Time 2 0.1 3000.0 s 10.0 249
P7.14 2 Decel Time 2 0.1 3000.0 s 10.0 250
1 = Enabled
P7.24 Currency $ 2121 0=$
1 = GBP
2 = Eur
3 = JPY
4 = Rs
5 = R$
6 = Fr
7 = Kr
Notes

Table 47. Drive Control—P7, continued

P7.25 Energy Cost 0 2122
1 = Daily Avg
2 = Weekly Avg
3 = Monthly Avg
4 = Yearly Avg
1 = Reset

1 = Speed Control
CT*1/10 CT*2
1 = Enabled
1 = Squared
2 = Programmable
P8.6 12 Voltage at FWP 10.00 200.00 % 100.00 290
P8.7 12 V/Hz Mid Frequency 0.00 Par. P8.5 Hz V/Hz Curve 291
Midpoint Freq
P8.8 12 V/Hz Mid Voltage 0.00 100.00 % 100.00 292
P8.10 2 Switching Frequency Min Switch Max Switch kHz Default Switching 288
Freq Freq Freq CT
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
FilterTime Constant

1 = Warning
4 = Fault
5 = Fault, Coast
Notes


1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast
P9.12 2 Stall Current Limit 0.1 Active Motor A Active Motor 314
Nom I*2 Nom I*13/10
3 = Enable, Changed
P9.24 2 Wait Time 0.10 10.00 s 0.50 321
P9.25 2 Trail Time 0.00 60.00 s 30.00 322
P9.34 12 RTC Fault 1 955 See P9.11
Response
1 = Yes
Notes


Response
1 = Enabled
Table 50. PID Controller 1—P10

P10.1 2 PID1 Control Gain 0.00 200.00 % 100.00 1294
P10.2 2 PID1 Control ITime 0.00 600.00 s 1.00 1295
P10.3 2 PID1 Control DTime 0.00 100.00 s 0.00 1296
P10.4 12 PID1 Process Unit 0 1297 0=%
1 = 1/min
2 = rpm
3 = ppm
4 = pps
5 = l/s
6 = l/min
7 = l/h
8 = kg/s
9 = kg/min
10 = kg/h
11 = m3/s
12 = m3/min
13 = m3/h
14 = m/s
15 = mbar
16 = bar
17 = Pa
18 = kPa
19 = mVS
20 = kW
21 = °C
22 = GPM
23 = gal/s
24 = gal/min
25 = gal/h
26 = lb/s
27 = lb/min
28 = lb/h
29 = CFM
30 = ft3/s
31 = ft3/min
32 = ft3/h
33 = ft/s
34 = in wg
35 = ft wg
36 = PSI
37 = lb/in2
38 = HP
39 = °F
P10.5 2 PID1 Process Unit Min –99999.99 99999.99 Varies 0.00 1298
Notes

Table 50. PID Controller 1—P10, continued

P10.6 2 PID1 Process Unit Max –99999.99 99999.99 Varies 100.00 1300
P10.7 2 PID1 Process Unit Decimal 0 4 2 1302
P10.8 12 PID1 Error Inversion 0 1303 0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
P10.9 2 PID1 Dead Band 0.00 99999.99 Varies 0.00 1304
P10.10 2 PID1 Dead Band Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 1306
P10.11 2 PID1 Keypad Set Point 1 Par. P10.5 Par. P10.6 Varies 0.00 1307
P10.13 2 PID1 Ramp Time 0.00 300.00 s 0.00 1311
P10.14 12 PID1 Set Point 1 Source 1 1312 0 = Not Used
1 = PID1 Keypad Set Point 1
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = Slot A: AI1
6 = Slot B: AI1
7 = FB Data Input 1
8 = FB Data Input 2
9 = FB Data Input 3
P10.15 2 PID1 Set Point 1 Min –200.00 200.00 % 0.00 1313
P10.16 2 PID1 Set Point 1 Max –200.00 200.00 % 100.00 1314
P10.17 12 PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep 0 1315 0 = Disabled
Enable 1 = Enabled
P10.18 2 PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq 0.00 400.00 Hz 0.00 1316
P10.19 2 PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay 0 3000 s 0 1317
P10.20 2 PID1 Set Point 1 Wake Up Par. P10.5 Par. P10.6 Varies 0.00 1318
Level
P10.21 2 PID1 Set Point 1 Boost –2.0 2.0 1.0 1320
P10.22 12 PID1 Set Point 2 Source 2 1321 See P10.14
Enable 1 = Enabled
Level
Notes


P10.30 12 PID1 Feedback Function 0 1330 0 = Source 1
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
2 = SQRT(Source 1–Source 2)
3 = SQRT(Source 1) +
SQRT(Source 2)
4 = Source 1 + Source 2
5 = Source 1–Source 2
6 = MIN(Source 1,Source 2)
7 = MAX(Source 1,Source 2)
8 = MEAN(Source1,Source2)
P10.31 2 PID1 Feedback Gain –1000.0 1000.0 % 100.0 1331
P10.32 12 PID1 Feedback 1 Source 1 1332 0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
P10.33 2 PID1 Feedback 1 Min –200.00 200.00 % 0.00 1333
P10.34 2 PID1 Feedback 1 Max –200.00 200.00 % 100.00 1334
P10.35 12 PID1 Feedback 2 Source 0 1335 See P10.32
P10.38 12 PID1 Feedforward Func 0 1338 0 = Source 1
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
SQRT(Source 2)
P10.39 2 PID1 Feedforward Gain –1000.0 1000.0 % 100.0 1339
P10.40 12 PID1 Feedforward 1 Source 0 1340 0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
P10.41 2 PID1 Feedforward 1 Min –200.00 200.00 % 0.00 1341
P10.42 2 PID1 Feedforward 1 Max –200.00 200.00 % 100.00 1342
Notes


P10.43 12 PID1 Feedforward 2 Source 0 1343 See P10.40
P10.46 2 PID1 Set Point 1 Comp 0 1352 0 = Disabled
Enable 1 = Enabled
P10.47 2 PID1 Set Point 1 Comp Max –200.00 200.00 % 0.00 1353
Enable 1 = Enabled


P14.1 12 DC-Brake Current Drive Nom Drive Nom A Drive Nom 254
CT*15/100 CT*15/10 CT*1/2
1 = B(Run) T(Rdy)
2 = External
3 = B(Rdy) T(Rdy)
4 = B(Run) T(No)
P14.6 12 Flux Brake 0 266 0 = Off
1 = On
P14.7 12 Flux Brake Current Active Motor Par. P8.2 A Active Motor 265
Nom I*1/10 Nom I*1/2
Notes

Table 53. Fire Mode—P15

P15.1 12 Fire Mode Function 0 535 0 = Closing Contact
1 = Opening Contact
P15.2 12 Fire Mode Ref Select 0 536 0 = Fire mode Min Frequency
Function 1 = Fire Mode Ref
2 = Fieldbus Ref
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID1 Control
P15.3 2 Fire Mode Min Frequency Par. P1.1 Par. P1.2 Hz 15.00 537
P15.4 2 Fire Mode Freq Ref 1 0.0 100.0 % 75.0 565
P15.6 12 Smoke Purge Frequency 0.0 100.0 % 50.0 554
Table 54. Second Motor Parameter—P16

P16.1 1 Motor Nom Current 2 Drive Nom Drive Nom A Drive Nom CT 577
CT*1/10 CT*1/10
P16.2 1 Motor Nom Speed 2 300 20000 rpm 2nd Motor Nom 578
Speed
P16.3 1 Motor PF 2 0.30 1.00 0.85 579
P16.4 1 Motor Nom Volt 2 180 690 V 2nd Motor Nom V 580
P16.5 1 Motor Nom Freq 2 8.00 400.00 Hz 2nd Motor Nom Freq 581
P16.6 1 Stator Resistor 2 0.001 65.535 ohm 0.033 1419
P16.7 1 Rotor Resistor 2 0.001 65.535 ohm 0.034 1420
P16.8 1 Leak Inductance 2 0.001 65.535 mh 0.128 1421
P16.9 1 Mutual Inductance 2 0.01 655.35 mh 3.44 1422
P16.10 1 Excitation Current 2 0.1 Drive Nom A 0.1 1423
Curr CT*2
Table 55. Bypass—P17

P17.1 12 Bypass Enable 0 1418 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.2 12 Bypass Start Delay 1 32765 s 5 544
P17.3 12 Auto Bypass 0 542 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.4 12 Auto Bypass Delay 0 32765 s 10 543
P17.5 12 Overcurrent Bypass Enable 0 547 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.6 12 IGBT Fault Bypass Enable 0 546 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.7 12 4 mA Fault Bypass Enable 0 548 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.8 12 Undervoltage Bypass Enable 0 545 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P17.9 12 Overvoltage Bypass Enable 0 549 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Notes

Table 56. Multi-Pump Operation Mode—P18.1.1

P18.1.1.1 Drive 1 0 2218 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.2 Drive 2 0 2230 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.3 Drive 3 0 2242 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.4 Drive 4 0 2254 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.5 Drive 5 0 2266 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
Table 57. Multi-Pump Status—P18.1.2

P18.1.2.1 Drive 1 5 2219 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.2 Drive 2 5 2231 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.3 Drive 3 5 2243 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.4 Drive 4 5 2255 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.5 Drive 5 5 2267 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
Notes

Table 58. Multi-Pump Network Status—P18.1.3

P18.1.3.1 Drive 1 0 2220 0 = Disconnected
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
3 = Need Alternation
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
Table 59. Multi-Pump Latest Fault Code—P18.2.1

P18.2.1.1 Drive 1 0 2221
P18.2.1.2 Drive 2 0 2233
P18.2.1.3 Drive 3 0 2245
P18.2.1.4 Drive 4 0 2257
P18.2.1.5 Drive 5 0 2269
Table 60. Multi-Pump Output Frequency—P18.2.2

P18.2.2.1 Drive 1 Hz 0 2222
P18.2.2.2 Drive 2 Hz 0 2234
P18.2.2.3 Drive 3 Hz 0 2246
P18.2.2.4 Drive 4 Hz 0 2258
P18.2.2.5 Drive 5 Hz 0 2270
Table 61. Multi-Pump Motor Voltage—P18.2.3

P18.2.3.1 Drive 1 V 0 2223
P18.2.3.2 Drive 2 V 0 2235
P18.2.3.3 Drive 3 V 0 2247
P18.2.3.4 Drive 4 V 0 2259
P18.2.3.5 Drive 5 V 0 2271
Notes

Table 62. Multi-Pump Motor Current—P18.2.4

P18.2.4.1 Drive 1 A 0 2224
P18.2.4.2 Drive 2 A 0 2236
P18.2.4.3 Drive 3 A 0 2248
P18.2.4.4 Drive 4 A 0 2260
P18.2.4.5 Drive 5 A 0 2272
Table 63. Multi-Pump Motor Torque—P18.2.5

P18.2.5.1 Drive 1 % 0 2225
P18.2.5.2 Drive 2 % 0 2237
P18.2.5.3 Drive 3 % 0 2249
P18.2.5.4 Drive 4 % 0 2261
P18.2.5.5 Drive 5 % 0 2273
Table 64. Multi-Pump Motor Power—P18.2.6

P18.2.6.1 Drive 1 % 0 2226
P18.2.6.2 Drive 2 % 0 2238
P18.2.6.3 Drive 3 % 0 2250
P18.2.6.4 Drive 4 % 0 2262
P18.2.6.5 Drive 5 % 0 2274
Table 65. Multi-Pump Motor Speed—P18.2.7

P18.2.7.1 Drive 1 rpm 0 2227
P18.2.7.2 Drive 2 rpm 0 2239
P18.2.7.3 Drive 3 rpm 0 2251
P18.2.7.4 Drive 4 rpm 0 2263
P18.2.7.5 Drive 5 rpm 0 2275
Table 66. Multi-Pump Motor Run Time—P18.2.8

P18.2.8.1 Drive 1 h 0 2228
P18.2.8.2 Drive 2 h 0 2240
P18.2.8.3 Drive 3 h 0 2252
P18.2.8.4 Drive 4 h 0 2264
P18.2.8.5 Drive 5 h 0 2276
Notes

Table 67. Multi-Pump Settings—P18.3

P18.3.1 12 Multi-pump Mode 0 2279 0 = Disable
1 = Single Drive Control
2 = Multi Drive Network
P18.3.2 12 Drive ID 0 5 0 2278
P18.3.3 12 Number of Motors 1 5 1 342
P18.3.4 12 Regulation Source 0 2284 0 = Network
1 = PID Controller 1
P18.3.5 12 Recovery Method 0 2285 0 = Automatic
1 = Stop
P18.3.6 12 Callback Source 0 2286 0 = No Action
1 = Safety Torque Off
P18.3.7 2 Add/Remove Drive 0 2311 0 = Drive ID
Selection 1 = Run Time
P18.3.8 2 PID Bandwidth 0 100 Varies 10 343
P18.3.9 12 Staging Frequency Par. P1.1 400 Par. P1.2 2315
P18.3.10 12 De-Staging Frequency 0 Par. P1.2 Par. P1.1 2316
P18.3.11 2 Add/Remove Delay 0 3600 s 10 344
P18.3.12 2 Interlock Enable 0 350 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.3.13 2 Include Freq Converter 1 346 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.3.14 2 Auto-Change Enable 0 345 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.3.15 2 Auto-Change Interval 0 3000 h 48 347
P18.3.16 2 Auto-Change Freq Limit Par. P1.1 Par. P1.2 Hz 25 349
P18.3.17 2 Auto-Change Motor Limit 0 5 1 348
P18.3.18 2 Run Time Enable 0 2280 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
P18.3.19 2 Run Time Limit 0 300000 h 0 2281
P18.3.20 2 Run Time Reset 0 2283 0 = No Action
1 = Reset
P18.3.21 12 Damper Start 0 483 0 = Normal
1 = Interlock Start
2 = Interlock Tout
3 = Interlock Delay
P18.3.22 12 Damper Time Out 1 32500 s 5 484
P18.3.23 12 Damper Delay 1 32500 s 5 485
Table 68. Real Time Clock—P19

P19.1 2 Interval 1 On Time 0,0,0 491
P19.2 2 Interval 1 Off Time 0,0,0 493
P19.3 2 Interval 1 From Day 0 517 0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
Notes

Table 68. Real Time Clock—P19, continued

P19.4 2 Interval 1 To Day 0 518 See P19.3
P19.5 2 Interval 1 Channel 0 519 0 = Not Used
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
P19.8 2 Interval 2 From Day 0 520 See P19.3
P19.10 2 Interval 2 Channel 0 522 See P19.5
P19.26 2 Timer 1 Duration 0 72000 s 0 511
P19.27 2 Timer 1 Channel 0 532 0 = Not Used
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
P19.29 2 Timer 2 Channel 0 533 See P19.27

Notes


1 = BACnet MS/TP
2 = SmartWire-DT
P20.2.2 Slave Address 1 247 1 587
P20.2.3 Baud Rate 1 584 0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 57600
4 = 115200
1 = Odd
2 = Even
Status 1 = Stopped
2 = Operational
3 = Faulted
1 = Busy

1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 76800
4 = 115200
Address
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Sole Master
3 = Baud Rate Fault

Notes

Table 72. EtherNet/IP / Modbus TCP—P20.3, continued

1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Busy
Table 73. SmartWire-DT—P20.4

P20.4.2 Baud Rate 0 2141 0 = 125 kBaud
1 = 250 kBaud

1 = Multi-Pump
2 = Multi-PID
3 = Multi-Purpose
1 = Reload Defaults
2 = Reload Set 1
3 = Reload Set 2
4 = Store Set 1
5 = Store Set 2
6 = Reset
P21.1.4 Up To Keypad 0 620 0 = No
1 = Yes
1 = All Parameters
2 = All, No Motor
3 = App Parameters
P21.1.7 Password 0 9999 0 624
Notes

Table 74. Basic Setting—P21.1, continued

1 = Change Disable
1 = Main Menu
2 = Multi-Monitor
3 = Favorite Menu
P21.1.11 Timeout Time 0 65535 s 30 629
1 = Temperature
2 = Run Follow
3 = Calculate Temp

Version
Version

1 = Yes

P21.4.1 Real Time Clock 0.0.0.1:1:13 566
1 = EU
2 = US
1 = Reset
Notes

Chapter 7—Multi-PID Application
Introduction I/O Controls

The Multi-PID Application is designed to be used with up to ● “Terminal To Function” (TTF) Programming
2 PID Control applications determined by the use of a digital
input; it is typically used with pumps and fans to maintain a The design behind the programming of the digital inputs in
desired set-point. With PID, the frequency converter is given the DG1 drive is to use “Terminal To Function”
a set reference from a keypad, analog inputs, or fieldbus programming, which is composed of multiple functions that
data-in. It also uses an analog probe that measures flow, get assigned a digital input to that function. The parameters
temperature, and pressure in the system referred to as in the drive are set up with specific functions and by defining
feedback. The frequency converter takes the feedback signal the digital input and slot in some cases, depending on which
and compares it to the set point. From there based off the options are available. For use of the drives control board
Gain, Integral time, and Derivative time, it corrects the speed inputs, they will be referred to as DigIN:1 through DigIN:8.
of the motor to meet the set point value and maintain it; no When additional option cards are used, they will be defined
additional components. Drive controlwise it provides the as DigIN:X:IOY:Z. The X indicates the slot that the card is
ability to have 2 control and reference locations with 8 digital being installed in, which will be either A or B. The IOY
inputs, 2 analog inputs, 3 relay outputs, 1 digital output, and determines the type of card it is, which would be IO1 or IO5.
2 analog outputs that are programmable. Motor control is The Z indicates which input is being used on that available
customizable to frequency or speed control, and the V/Hz option card.
curve can be programmable. Drive/Motor protection ● “Function To Terminal” (FTT) Programming
selections can be programmable to defined actions. Below
is a list of additional features available in addition to the The design behind the programming of the relay outputs
Standard and Multi-Pump and Fan Application features that and digital output in the DG1 drive is to use “Function To
are available in the Multi-PID Application. Terminal” programming. It is composed of a terminal, be it a
Select the Multi-PID Application in menu P21.1.2. Within that parameter, it has different functions that can be set.
Multi-PID Application includes all the functions in Multi-Pump The parameters of the Multi-PID Application are explained
and Fan Application, and Additional functions: on Page 150 of this manual, “Description of Parameters.”
● The Second PID control The explanations are arranged according to the parameter
number.
Figure 38. PID Controller Flowchart


Table 78. Multi-PID Application Default I/O Configuration

Res

i
Notes


Port Communication
RJ45 Keypad Port
RJ45 Ethernet Port
1
RS-485 Serial Port

Multi-PID Application—Parameters List


M16 DI1, DI2, DI3 0 12
M17 DI4, DI5, DI6 0 13
M18 DI7, DI8 0 576
M19 DO1 0 14
M20 RO1, RO2, RO3 0 557
M21 TC1, TC2, TC3 0 558
1 = Active
M27 Timer 1 s 0 569
M28 Timer 2 s 0 571
M29 Timer 3 s 0 573


1 = Running
2 = Sleep Mode
M39 PID2 Status 0 39 See M34
in Appendix B
1 = Installed
2 = Change Battery
3 = Over Voltage


P1.3 2 Accel Time 1 0.1 3000.0 s 3.0 103
P1.4 2 Decel Time 1 0.1 3000.0 s 3.0 104
CT*1/10 CT*2
P1.7 1 Motor PF 0.30 1.00 0.85 490
Notes


2 = Remote Control
1 = Fieldbus
2 = I/O Terminal 2
3 = Keypad
2 = I/O Terminal 2
3 = Fieldbus
1 = AI2
2 = Slot A: AI1
3 = Slot B: AI1
4 = AI1 Joystick
5 = AI2 Joystick
6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
9 = Max Frequency
10 = AI1 + AI2
11 = AI1–AI2
12 = AI2–AI1
13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
15 = Min (AI1, AI2)
16 = MAX(AI1,AI2)
1 = Enabled

P2.1 AI1 Mode 1 222 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
1 = 20–100% / 4–20 mA / 2–10 V
2 = Customized
P2.5 2 AI1 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 0.10 174
1 = Inverted
P2.8 2 AI1 Sleep Limit 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 179
P2.9 2 AI1 Sleep Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 180
P2.11 AI2 Mode 0 223 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
2 = –10 to +10 V
Notes


0 to 10 V / –10 to 10 V
1 = 20–100% / 4–20 mA /
2 to 10 V / –6 to 10 V
2 = Customized
P2.15 2 AI2 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 0.10 182
P2.18 2 AI2 Sleep Limit 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 187
P2.19 2 AI2 Sleep Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 188
Notes


1 = Start–Reverse
2 = Start–Enable
2 = DigIN: 1
3 = DigIN: 2
4 = DigIN: 3
5 = DigIN: 4
6 = DigIN: 5
7 = DigIN: 6
8 = DigIN: 7
9 = DigIN: 8
10 = DigIN: A: IO1: 1
11 = DigIN: A: IO1: 2
12 = DigIN: A: IO1: 3
13 = DigIN: A: IO5: 1
14 = DigIN: A: IO5: 2
15 = DigIN: A: IO5: 3
16 = DigIN: A: IO5: 4
17 = DigIN: A: IO5: 5
18 = DigIN: A: IO5: 6
19 = DigIN: B: IO1: 1
20 = DigIN: B: IO1: 2
21 = DigIN: B: IO1: 3
22 = DigIN: B: IO5: 1
23 = DigIN: B: IO5: 2
24 = DigIN: B: IO5: 3
25 = DigIN: B: IO5: 4
26 = DigIN: B: IO5: 5
27 = DigIN: B: IO5: 6
28 = Time Channel 1
29 = Time Channel 2
30 = Time Channel 3
Notes


2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
Notes


2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
Notes


P4.1 2 AO1 Mode 0 227 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
2 = Freq Reference
3 = Motor Speed
4 = Motor Current
6 = Motor Power
7 = Motor Voltage
8 = DC-Bus Voltage
9 = PID1 Setpoint
14 = PID2 Setpoint
19 = AI1
20 = AI2
P4.3 2 AO1 Minimum 1 149 0 = 0 V / 0 mA
1 = 2 V / 4 mA
P4.4 2 AO1 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 1.00 147
P4.5 2 AO1 Scale 10 1000 % 100 150
1 = Inverted
P4.7 2 AO1 Offset –100.00 100.00 % 0.00 173
P4.8 2 AO2 Mode 0 228 See P4.1
P4.11 2 AO2 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 1.00 230
P4.12 2 AO2 Scale 10 1000 % 100 233
P4.14 2 AO2 Offset –100.00 100.00 % 0.00 234
Notes


1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault Invert
5 = Warning
6 = Reversed
7 = At Speed
8 = Zero Frequency
11 = PID1 Superv
12 = PID2 Superv
13 = Overheat Fault
Direction
25 = Fire Mode
26 = In Bypass Mode
28 = Remote Control
35 = Damper Control
36 = TC1 Status
37 = TC2 Status
38 = TC3 Status
39 = In E-Stop
48 = Logic Fulfilled
49 = PID1 Sleep
50 = PID2 Sleep
55 = Preheat Active
Notes


1 = AI2
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
P5.30 RO1 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2111
P5.31 RO1 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2112
P5.32 RO2 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2113
P5.33 RO2 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2114
P5.34 RO3 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2115
P5.35 RO3 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2116
P5.36 RO3 Reverse 0 2117 0 = No
1 = Yes
Notes


1 = AI2
P5.46 2 AI Supv Hyst 1 10 % 1 2198

1 = Reverse
1 = Always Enabled
1 = Flying Start
1 = Ramp
P7.11 2 Ramp 1 Shape 0.0 10.0 s 0.0 247
P7.12 2 Ramp 2 Shape 0.0 10.0 s 0.0 248
P7.13 2 Accel Time 2 0.1 3000.0 s 10.0 249
P7.14 2 Decel Time 2 0.1 3000.0 s 10.0 250
Notes


1 = Enabled
P7.24 Currency $ 2121 0=$
1 = GBP
2 = Eur
3 = JPY
4 = Rs
5 = R$
6 = Fr
7 = Kr
P7.25 Energy Cost 0 2122
1 = Daily Avg
2 = Weekly Avg
3 = Monthly Avg
4 = Yearly Avg
1 = Reset

1 = Speed Control
P8.2 1 Current Limit Drive Nom Drive Nom A Drive Nom CT 107
CT*1/10 CT*2
1 = Enabled
1 = Squared
2 = Programmable
P8.6 12 Voltage at FWP 10.00 200.00 % 100.00 290
Midpoint Freq
P8.8 12 V/Hz Mid Voltage 0.00 100.00 % 100.00 292
Freq Freq Freq CT
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
FilterTime Constant
Notes


1 = Warning
4 = Fault
5 = Fault, Coast
1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast
Nom I*2 I*13/10
3 = Enable, Changed
P9.24 2 Wait Time 0.10 10.00 s 0.50 321
P9.25 2 Trail Time 0.00 60.00 s 30.00 322
P9.34 12 RTC Fault 1 955 See P9.11
Notes


Response
1 = Yes
Response
1 = Enabled

Notes


1 = 1/min
2 = rpm
3 = ppm
4 = pps
5 = l/s
6 = l/min
7 = l/h
8 = kg/s
9 = kg/min
10 = kg/h
11 = m3/s
12 = m3/min
13 = m3/h
14 = m/s
15 = mbar
16 = bar
17 = Pa
18 = kPa
19 = mVS
20 = kW
21 = °C
22 = GPM
23 = gal/s
24 = gal/min
25 = gal/h
26 = lb/s
27 = lb/min
28 = lb/h
29 = CFM
30 = ft3/s
31 = ft3/min
32 = ft3/h
33 = ft/s
34 = in wg
35 = ft wg
36 = PSI
37 = lb/in2
38 = HP
39 = °F
1 = Inverted
P10.13 2 PID1 Ramp Time 0.00 300.00 s 0.00 1311
Notes


3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = Slot A: AI1
6 = Slot B: AI1
7 = FB Data Input 1
8 = FB Data Input 2
9 = FB Data Input 3
Enable 1 = Enabled
Level
Enable 1 = Enabled
Level
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
SQRT(Source 2)
Notes

1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
SQRT(Source 2)
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
Enable 1 = Enabled
Enable 1 = Enabled
Notes

P11.2 2 PID2 Control I Time 0.00 600.00 s 1.00 1357
P11.3 2 PID2 Control D Time 0.00 100.00 s 0.00 1358
P11.4 12 PID2 Process Unit 0 1359 See P10.4
1 = Inverted
P11.13 2 PID2 Ramp Time 0.00 300.00 s 0.00 1373
Enable 1 = Enabled
P11.20 2 PID2 Set Point 1 WakeUp Par. P11.5 Par. P11.6 Varies 0.00 1380
Level
Enable 1 = Enabled
Level
P11.30 12 PID2 Feedback Func 0 1392 See P10.30
P11.38 12 PID2 Feedforward Func 0 1400 See P10.38
Notes

P11.46 2 PID2 Set Point1 Comp 0 1414 0 = Disabled
Enable 1 = Enabled
P11.47 2 PID2 Set Point1 Comp Max –200.00 200.00 % 0.00 1415
Enable 1 = Enabled


P14.1 12 DC-Brake Current Drive Nom Drive Nom A Drive Nom CT*1/2 254
CT*15/100 CT*15/10
1 = B(Run) T(Rdy)
2 = External
3 = B(Rdy) T(Rdy)
4 = B(Run) T(No)
P14.6 12 Flux Brake 0 266 0 = Off
1 = On
P14.7 12 Flux Brake Current Active Motor Par. P8.2 A Active Motor Nom 265
Nom I*1/10 I*1/2
Notes

1 = Opening Contact
P15.2 12 Fire Mode Ref Select 0 536 0 = Fire Mode Min Frequency
Function 1 = Fire Mode Reference
2 = Fieldbus Reference
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID1 Control

CT*1/10 CT*2
Speed
P16.3 1 Motor PF 2 0.30 1.00 0.85 579
P16.4 1 Motor Nom Volt 2 180 690 V 2nd Motor Nom Volt 580
Curr CT*2

1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
Notes

P18.1.1.1 Drive 1 0 2218 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.2 Drive 2 0 2230 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.3 Drive 3 0 2242 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.4 Drive 4 0 2254 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.5 Drive 5 0 2266 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive

P18.1.2.1 Drive 1 5 2219 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.2 Drive 2 5 2231 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.3 Drive 3 5 2243 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.4 Drive 4 5 2255 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.5 Drive 5 5 2267 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
Notes

1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error

P18.2.1.1 Drive 1 0 2221
P18.2.1.2 Drive 2 0 2233
P18.2.1.3 Drive 3 0 2245
P18.2.1.4 Drive 4 0 2257
P18.2.1.5 Drive 5 0 2269

P18.2.2.1 Drive 1 Hz 0 2222
P18.2.2.2 Drive 2 Hz 0 2234
P18.2.2.3 Drive 3 Hz 0 2246
P18.2.2.4 Drive 4 Hz 0 2258
P18.2.2.5 Drive 5 Hz 0 2270

P18.2.3.1 Drive 1 V 0 2223
P18.2.3.2 Drive 2 V 0 2235
P18.2.3.3 Drive 3 V 0 2247
P18.2.3.4 Drive 4 V 0 2259
P18.2.3.5 Drive 5 V 0 2271
Notes

P18.2.4.1 Drive 1 A 0 2224
P18.2.4.2 Drive 2 A 0 2236
P18.2.4.3 Drive 3 A 0 2248
P18.2.4.4 Drive 4 A 0 2260
P18.2.4.5 Drive 5 A 0 2272

P18.2.5.1 Drive 1 % 0 2225
P18.2.5.2 Drive 2 % 0 2237
P18.2.5.3 Drive 3 % 0 2249
P18.2.5.4 Drive 4 % 0 2261
P18.2.5.5 Drive 5 % 0 2273

P18.2.6.1 Drive 1 % 0 2226
P18.2.6.2 Drive 2 % 0 2238
P18.2.6.3 Drive 3 % 0 2250
P18.2.6.4 Drive 4 % 0 2262
P18.2.6.5 Drive 5 % 0 2274

P18.2.7.1 Drive 1 rpm 0 2227
P18.2.7.2 Drive 2 rpm 0 2239
P18.2.7.3 Drive 3 rpm 0 2251
P18.2.7.4 Drive 4 rpm 0 2263
P18.2.7.5 Drive 5 rpm 0 2275
Notes

P18.2.8.1 Drive 1 h 0 2228
P18.2.8.2 Drive 2 h 0 2240
P18.2.8.3 Drive 3 h 0 2252
P18.2.8.4 Drive 4 h 0 2264
P18.2.8.5 Drive 5 h 0 2276

P18.3.1 12 Multi-pump Mode 0 2279 0 = Disabled
P18.3.2 12 Drive ID 0 5 0 2278
1 = Feedback
1 = Stop
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
P18.3.19 2 Run Time Limit 0 300000 h 0 2281
1 = Reset
1 = Interlock Start
2 = Interlock Tout
3 = Interlock Delay
P18.3.23 12 Damper Delay 1 32500 s 5 485
Notes

1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
Notes


1 = BACnet MS/TP
2 = SmartWire-DT
P20.2.2 Slave Address 1 247 1 587
P20.2.3 Baud Rate 1 584 0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 57600
4 = 115200
1 = Odd
2 = Even
Status 1 = Stopped
2 = Operational
3 = Faulted
1 = Busy
Notes

1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 76800
4 = 115200
Address
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Sole Master
3 = Baud Rate Fault

1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Busy
Table 114. SmartWire DT—P20.4

P20.4.2 Baud Rate 0 2141 0 = 125 kBaud
1 = 250 kBaud
Notes

1 = Multi-Pump
2 = Multi-PID
3 = Multi-Purpose
1 = Reload Defaults
2 = Reload Set 1
3 = Reload Set 2
4 = Store Set 1
5 = Store Set 2
6 = Reset
P21.1.4 Up To Keypad 0 620 0 = No
1 = Yes
1 = All Parameters
2 = All, No Motor
3 = App Parameters
P21.1.7 Password 0 9999 0 624
1 = Change Disable
1 = Main Menu
2 = Multi-Monitor
3 = Favorite Menu
P21.1.11 Timeout Time 0 65535 s 30 629
1 = Temperature
2 = Run Follow
3 = Calculate Temp

Version
Version
Notes

1 = Yes

P21.4.1 Real Time Clock 0:0.0.1:1:13 566
1 = EU
2 = US
1 = Reset
Notes
Chapter 8—Multi-Purpose Application
Introduction ● I/O Controls
The Multi-Purpose Application is designed for a large set of ● “Terminal To Function” (TTF) Programming
applications with the ability to have advanced motor control The design behind the programming of the digital inputs
systems. It takes the same functions provided in the in the DG1 drive is to use “Terminal To Function”
Standard, Multi-Pump and Fan, and Multi-PID applications programming. It is composed of multiple functions that
and adds in some additional control techniques. The get assigned a digital input to that function, the
application is designed with 2 control places that use 8 digital parameters in the drive are set up with specific
inputs, 2 analog inputs, 3 relay outputs, 1 digital output, and functions and by defining the Digital input and slot in
2 analog outputs that are programmable. Motor controlwise some cases depending on the what options are
it provides the ability to do frequency and speed control and available. For use of the drives control board inputs they
adds Open Loop Speed Control as well as Torque Control. will be referred to as DigIN:1 through DigIN:8. When
For tuning the V/Hz curve, it has the ability to go out and ID additional option cards are used, they will be defined as
the motor characteristic and enters those specific DigIN:X:IOY:Z. The X indicates the slot that the card is
measurements into its parameters for better control. Drive/ being installed in which will be either A or B, then the
Motor protections are programmable for desired actions IOY determines the type of card it is, which would be
depending on the application. Below is a list of additional IO1 or IO5, and the Z would indicate which input is
features available in addition to the Standard, Multi-Pump being used on that available option card.
and Fan, and Multi-PID Application features that are available
in the Multi-Purpose Application. ● “Function To Terminal” (FTT) Programming
● Motor potentiometer reference control The design behind the programming of the relay outputs
and digital output in the DG1 drive is to use “Function To
● External Brake control Terminal” programming. It is composed of a terminal be
● Droop function with multiple loads it a relay output or a digital output that is assigned a
parameter. Within that parameter, it has different
● Motor Identification functions that can be set.
● Motor Control modes The parameters of the Multi-Purpose Application are
explained on Page 150 of this manual, “Description of
Parameters.” The explanations are arranged according to the
parameter number.

Table 119. Multi-Purpose Application Default I/O Configuration

Res

i
Notes

Port Communication
RJ45 Keypad Port
RJ45 Ethernet Port
1
RS-485 Serial Port
Multi-Purpose Application—Parameters List


M11 Torque Reference % 0.0 15
M16 DI1, DI2, DI3 0 12
M17 DI4, DI5, DI6 0 13
M18 DI7, DI8 0 576
M19 DO1 0 14
M20 RO1, RO2, RO3 0 557
M21 TC1, TC2, TC3 0 558
1 = Active
M27 Timer 1 s 0 569
M28 Timer 2 s 0 571
M29 Timer 3 s 0 573

1 = Running
2 = Sleep Mode
M39 PID2 Status 0 39 See M34
in Appendix B
1 = Installed
2 = Change Battery
3 = Over Voltage

R11 Keypad Torque Ref –300.0 300.0 % 0.0 782

P1.3 2 Accel Time 1 0.1 3000.0 s 3.0 103
P1.4 2 Decel Time 1 0.1 3000.0 s 3.0 104
CT*1/10 CT*2
P1.7 1 Motor PF 0.30 1.00 0.85 490
2 = Remote Control
1 = Fieldbus
2 = I/O Terminal 2
3 = Keypad
2 = I/O Terminal 2
3 = Fieldbus
Notes

1 = AI2
2 = Slot A: AI1
3 = Slot B: AI1
4 = AI1 Joystick
5 = AI2 Joystick
6 = Keypad
7 = Fieldbus Ref
8 = Motor Pot
9 = Max Frequency
10 = AI1 + AI2
11 = AI1–AI2
12 = AI2–AI1
13 = AI1 * AI2
14 = AI1 or AI2
15 = Min (AI1, AI2)
16 = MAX(AI1,AI2)
1 = Enabled

P2.1 AI1 Mode 1 222 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
1 = 20–100% / 4–20 mA / 2–10 V
2 = Customized
P2.5 2 AI1 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 0.10 174
1 = Inverted
P2.8 2 AI1 Sleep Limit 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 179
P2.9 2 AI1 Sleep Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 180
P2.11 AI2 Mode 0 223 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
2 = –10 to +10 V
0 to 10 V / –10 to 10 V
1 = 20–100% / 4–20 mA /
2 to 10 V / –6 to 10 V
2 = Customized
P2.15 2 AI2 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 0.10 182
P2.18 2 AI2 Sleep Limit 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 187
Notes

P2.19 2 AI2 Sleep Delay 0.00 320.00 s 0.00 188

1 = Start–Reverse
2 = Start–Enable
2 = DigIN: 1
3 = DigIN: 2
4 = DigIN: 3
5 = DigIN: 4
6 = DigIN: 5
7 = DigIN: 6
8 = DigIN: 7
9 = DigIN: 8
10 = DigIN: A: IO1: 1
11 = DigIN: A: IO1: 2
12 = DigIN: A: IO1: 3
13 = DigIN: A: IO5: 1
14 = DigIN: A: IO5: 2
15 = DigIN: A: IO5: 3
16 = DigIN: A: IO5: 4
17 = DigIN: A: IO5: 5
18 = DigIN: A: IO5: 6
19 = DigIN: B: IO1: 1
20 = DigIN: B: IO1: 2
21 = DigIN: B: IO1: 3
22 = DigIN: B: IO5: 1
23 = DigIN: B: IO5: 2
24 = DigIN: B: IO5: 3
25 = DigIN: B: IO5: 4
26 = DigIN: B: IO5: 5
27 = DigIN: B: IO5: 6
28 = Time Channel 1
29 = Time Channel 2
30 = Time Channel 3
Notes

P3.18 2 Accel Pot Value 0 203 See P3.2
P3.19 2 Decel Pot Value 0 204 See P3.2
P3.20 2 Reset Pot Zero 0 216 See P3.2
Notes

2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
2 = High Motor temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
Notes

P4.1 2 AO1 Mode 0 227 0 = 0–20 mA
1 = 0–10 V
2 = Freq Reference
3 = Motor Speed
4 = Motor Current
6 = Motor Power
7 = Motor Voltage
8 = DC-Bus Voltage
9 = PID1 Setpoint
14 = PID2 Setpoint
19 = AI1
20 = AI2
P4.3 2 AO1 Minimum 1 149 0 = 0 V / 0 mA
1 = 2 V / 4 mA
P4.4 2 AO1 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 1.00 147
P4.5 2 AO1 Scale 10 1000 % 100 150
P4.6 2 AO1 Inversion 0 148 0 = Not inverted
1 = Inverted
P4.7 2 AO1 Offset –100.00 100.00 % 0.00 173
P4.8 2 AO2 Mode 0 228 See P4.1
P4.11 2 AO2 Filter Time 0.00 10.00 s 1.00 230
P4.12 2 AO2 Scale 10 1000 % 100 233
P4.14 2 AO2 Offset –100.00 100.00 % 0.00 234
Notes

1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
4 = Fault Invert
5 = Warning
6 = Reversed
7 = At Speed
8 = Zero Frequency
11 = PID1 Superv
12 = PID2 Superv
13 = Overheat Fault
18 = Ext Brake Control
19 = Ext Brake Inverted
Direction
25 = Fire Mode
26 = In Bypass Mode
28 = Remote Control
35 = Damper Control
36 = TC1 Status
37 = TC2 Status
38 = TC3 Status
39 = In E-Stop
49 = PID1 Sleep
50 = PID2 Sleep
55 = Preheat Active
Notes

3 = Brake-on Control
3 = Brake-off Control
4 = Brake-on/off Control
3 = Brake-off Control
P5.13 2 Ext Brake Off Delay 0.0 100.0 s 0.5 163
P5.14 2 Ext Brake On Delay 0.0 100.0 s 1.5 164
1 = AI2
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
P5.30 RO1 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2111
P5.31 RO1 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2112
P5.32 RO2 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2113
P5.33 RO2 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2114
P5.34 RO3 On Delay 0 320 s 0 2115
P5.35 RO3 Off Delay 0 320 s 0 2116
P5.36 RO3 Reverse 0 2117 0 = No
1 = Yes
Notes

1 = AI2
P5.46 2 AI Supv Hyst 1 10 % 1 2198
Notes
Table 128. Logic Function—P6

P6.1 2 Logic Function Select 0 751 0 = AND
1 = OR
2 = XOR
P6.2 2 Logic Operation Input A 0 752 0 = Not Used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
6 = Reversed
7 = Warning
8 = Zero Frequency
16 = In Bypass Mode
17 = At Speed
18 = Remote Control
22 = PID1 Superv
23 = PID2 Superv
24 = Overheat Fault
Direction
35 = Thermal Fault/Warning
36 = Bypass Enable
43 = Damper Control
44 = TC1 Status
45 = TC2 Status
46 = TC3 Status
47 = In E-Stop
Notes
Table 128. Logic Function—P6, continued

P6.3 2 Logic Operation Input B 0 753 0 = Not Used
1 = Ready
2 = Run
3 = Fault
6 = Reversed
7 = Warning
8 = Zero Frequency
16 = In Bypass Mode
17 = At Speed
18 = Remote Control
22 = PID1 Superv
23 = PID2 Superv
24 = Overheat Fault
Direction
35 = Thermal Fault/Warning
36 = Bypass Enable
43 = Damper Control
44 = TC1 Status
45 = TC2 Status
46 = TC3 Status
47 = In E-Stop

P7.1 2 Remote 2 Control Place 1 138 0 = I/O Terminal
1 = Fieldbus
1 = Reverse
1 = Always Enabled
Notes

P7.7 2 Motor Pot Ramp Time 0.1 2000.0 Hz/s 10.0 156
P7.8 2 Motor Pot Ref Reset 0 169 0 = No Reset
1 = Reset: Stop + Power Down
2 = Reset: Power Down
1 = Flying Start
1 = Ramp
P7.11 2 Ramp 1 Shape 0.0 10.0 s 0.0 247
P7.12 2 Ramp 2 Shape 0.0 10.0 s 0.0 248
P7.13 2 Accel Time 2 0.1 3000.0 s 10.0 249
P7.14 2 Decel Time 2 0.1 3000.0 s 10.0 250
1 = Enabled
P7.24 2 Currency $ 2121 0=$
1 = GBP
2 = Eur
3 = JPY
4 = Rs
5 = R$
6 = Fr
7 = Kr
P7.25 2 Energy Cost 0 2122
P7.26 2 Data Type 0 2123 0 = Cumulative
1 = Daily Avg
2 = Weekly
3 = Monthly Avg
4 = Yearly Avg
1 = Reset

1 = Speed Control
5 = Open Loop Speed Control
6 = Open Loop Torque Control
CT*1/10 CT*2
1 = Enabled
Notes
Table 130. Motor Control—P8, continued

1 = Squared
2 = Programmable
P8.6 12 Voltage at FWP 10.00 200.00 % 100.00 290
Midpoint Freq
P8.8 12 V/Hz Mid Voltage 0.00 100.00 % 100.00 292
Freq Freq Freq CT
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
P8.13 2 Load Drooping 0.00 100.00 % 0.00 298
P8.14 2 Identification 0 299 0 = No Action
1 = Identification Only Stator
Resistor
2 = Identification with Run
3 = Identification No Run
P8.15 12 Neg Frequency Limit –400.00 Par. P8.16 Hz –400.00 1574
P8.16 12 Pos Frequency Limit Par. P8.15 400.00 Hz 400.00 1576
FilterTime Constant
P8.18 2 Speed Error Filter Time 0 3000 ms 0 1591
Constant
P8.19 2 Speed Error Band Stop 0.00 320.00 Hz 0.00 1592
Frequency
P8.20 2 Speed Control Kp 0.0 1000.0 % 100.0 1593
P8.21 2 Speed Control Ti 0.0 3200.0 ms 20.0 1594
P8.22 2 Speed Control Kp At Field 0.0 1000.0 % 100.0 1595
Weakening
P8.23 2 Speed Control Kp Below F0 0.0 1000.0 % 0.0 1596
P8.24 2 Speed Control F0 0.00 Par. P8.25 Hz 0.00 1597
P8.25 2 Speed Control F1 Par. P8.24 Par. P8.5 Hz 0.00 1598
P8.26 2 Speed Control Kp Below T0 0.0 1000.0 % 0.0 1599
P8.27 2 Speed Control T0 0.0 100.0 % 0.0 1600
P8.28 2 Speed Control Kp Filter Time 0 3000 ms 0 1601
Constant
P8.29 2 Motoring Torque Limit 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1602
P8.30 2 Generator Torque Limit 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1603
P8.31 2 Torque Limit Forward 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1604
P8.32 2 Torque Limit Reverse 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1605
P8.33 2 Motoring Power Limit 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1607
P8.34 2 Generator Power Limit 0.0 300.0 % 300.0 1608
P8.35 2 Acc Compensation Time 0.0 1000.0 % 0.0 1611
Constant
Notes
Table 130. Motor Control—P8, continued

P8.36 2 Acc Compensation Filter 0 3000 ms 0 1612
Time Constant
P8.37 2 Flux Reference 0.0 500.0 % 100.0 1620
P8.38 2 Stop State Magnetization 0.0 100.0 % 100.0 1621
P8.40 2 Flux Current Ramp Time 0 32000 ms 200 1623
P8.41 2 Zero Speed Start Time 0 32000 ms 100 1624
P8.42 2 Zero Speed Stop Time 0 32000 ms 100 1625
P8.43 2 Droop Control Filter Time 0 3000 ms 0 1630
Constant
P8.44 2 Startup Torque Selection 0 1631 0 = Not Used
1 = TorqueMemory
2 = TorqueReference
3 = StartupTorqueFWD/REV
P8.45 2 Torque Memory Start –300.0 300.0 % 0.0 1632
P8.46 2 Startup Torque Forward –300.0 300.0 % 0.0 1633
P8.47 2 Startup Torque Reverse –300.0 300.0 % 0.0 1634
P8.48 Startup Torque Actual % 1635
P8.49 2 Startup Torque Time 0 10000 ms 50 1667
P8.50 1 Stator Resistor 0.001 65.535 ohm 0.033 771
P8.51 1 Rotor Resistor 0.001 65.535 ohm 0.034 772
P8.52 1 Leak Inductance 0.001 65.535 mh 0.128 773
P8.53 1 Mutual Inductance 0.01 655.35 mh 3.44 774
P8.54 1 Excitation Current 0.1 Drive Nom A 0.1 775
CT*2

1 = Warning
4 = Fault
5 = Fault, Coast
1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast
Notes

Nom I*2 I*13/10
3 = Enable, Changed
P9.24 2 Wait Time 0.10 10.00 s 0.50 321
P9.25 2 Trail Time 0.00 60.00 s 30.00 322
P9.34 12 RTC Fault 1 955 See P9.11
Response
1 = Yes
Response
1 = Enabled
Notes

1 = 1/min
2 = rpm
3 = ppm
4 = pps
5 = l/s
6 = l/min
7 = l/h
8 = kg/s
9 = kg/min
10 = kg/h
11 = m3/s
12 = m3/min
13 = m3/h
14 = m/s
15 = mbar
16 = bar
17 = Pa
18 = kPa
19 = mVS
20 = kW
21 = °C
22 = GPM
23 = gal/s
24 = gal/min
25 = gal/h
26 = lb/s
27 = lb/min
28 = lb/h
29 = CFM
30 = ft3/s
31 = ft3/min
32 = ft3/h
33 = ft/s
34 = in wg
35 = ft wg
36 = PSI
37 = lb/in2
38 = HP
39 = °F
1 = Inverted
P10.13 2 PID1 Ramp Time 0.00 300.00 s 0.00 1311
Notes

3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = Slot A: AI1
6 = Slot B: AI1
7 = FB Data Input 1
8 = FB Data Input 2
9 = FB Data Input 3
Enable 1 = Enabled
Level
Enable 1 = Enabled
Level
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
SQRT(Source 2)
Notes

1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
1 = SQRT(Source 1)
SQRT(Source 2)
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = FB Data Input 1
6 = FB Data Input 2
7 = FB Data Input 3
8 = FB Data Input 4
9 = FB Data Input 5
Enable 1 = Enabled
Enable 1 = Enabled
Notes

P11.2 2 PID2 Control I Time 0.00 600.00 s 1.00 1357
P11.3 2 PID2 Control D Time 0.00 100.00 s 0.00 1358
P11.4 12 PID2 Process Unit 0 1359 See P10.4
1 = Inverted
P11.13 2 PID2 Ramp Time 0.00 300.00 s 0.00 1373
Enable 1 = Enabled
Level
Enable 1 = Enabled
Level
P11.30 12 PID2 Feedback Func 0 1392 See P10.30
P11.38 12 PID2 Feedforward Func 0 1400 See P10.38
Notes

P11.46 2 PID2 Set Point1 Comp 0 1414 0 = Disabled
Enable 1 = Enabled
P11.47 2 PID2 Set Point1 Comp Max –200.00 200.00 % 0.00 1415
Enable 1 = Enabled

Table 135. Torque Control—P13

P13.1 2 Torque Limit 0.0 400.0 % 400.0 295
P13.2 2 Torque Ref Select 0 303 0 = Not Used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = Slot A: AI1
4 = Slot B: AI1
5 = AI1 Joystick
6 = AI2 Joystick
7 = Keypad Torque Ref
8 = FB Data Input 1
P13.3 Keypad Torque Ref –300.0 300.0 % 0.0 782
P13.4 2 Torque Ref Max –300.0 300.0 % 100.0 304
P13.5 2 Torque Ref Min –300.0 300.0 % 0.0 305
P13.6 Speed Limiter Mode 0 1666 0 = NegFreqMax…PosFreqMax
1 = -|FreqRampOut|…
+|FreqRampOut|
2 = NegFreqMax…
FreqRampOut(MIN)
3 = FreqRampOut…
PosFreqMax (MAX)
4 = FreqRampOut +
-WindowPos/NegWidth
5 = 0…FreqRampOut (pos or
neg direction)
6 = FreqRamp + -WindowPos/Neg/
PosOff/NegOff
Notes
Table 135. Torque Control—P13, continued

P13.7 2 Window Pos Width 0.00 50.00 Hz 2.00 1636
P13.8 2 Window Neg Width 0.00 50.00 Hz 2.00 1637
P13.9 2 Window Pos Off Limit 0.00 Par. P13.7 Hz 0.00 1638
P13.10 2 WindowNeg Off Limit 0.00 Par. P13.8 Hz 0.00 1639
P13.11 2 Torque Reference Filter TC 0 32000 ms 0 1640
P13.12 Pull Out Torque 0 1000.0 % 250.0 1606
P13.13 Startup Torque Time 0 10000 ms 50 1667
P13.14 Stop State Magnetization 0 32000 S 0 1684
Time

P14.1 12 DC-Brake Current Drive Nom Drive Nom A Drive Nom CT*1/2 254
CT*15/100 CT*15/10
1 = B(Run) T(Rdy)
2 = External
3 = B(Rdy) T(Rdy)
4 = B(Run) T(No)
P14.6 12 Flux Brake 0 266 0 = Off
1 = On
P14.7 12 Flux Brake Current Active Motor Par. P8.2 A Active Motor Nom 265
Nom I*1/10 I*1/2

1 = Opening Contact
P15.2 12 Fire Mode Ref Select 0 536 0 = Fire Mode Min Frequency
Function 1 = Fire Mode Reference
2 = Fieldbus Reference
3 = AI1
4 = AI2
5 = AI1+AI2
6 = PID1 Control
Notes

CT*1/10 CT*2
Speed
P16.3 1 Motor PF 2 0.30 1.00 0.85 579
P16.4 1 Motor Nom Volt 2 180 690 V 2nd Motor Nom Volt 580
CT*2

1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled

P18.1.1.1 Drive 1 0 2218 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.2 Drive 2 0 2230 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
Notes
Table 140. Multi-Pump Operation Mode—P18.1.1, continued

P18.1.1.3 Drive 3 0 2242 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.4 Drive 4 0 2254 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive
P18.1.1.5 Drive 5 0 2266 0 = Offline
1 = Slave Drive
2 = Master Drive

P18.1.2.1 Drive 1 5 2219 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.2 Drive2 5 2231 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.3 Drive 3 5 2243 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.4 Drive 4 5 2255 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
P18.1.2.5 Drive 5 5 2267 0 = Stopped
1 = Sleep
2 = Regulating
3 = Wait for CMD
4 = Following
5 = Unknown
Notes

1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error
1 = Fault
2 = Pump Lost
4 = No Error

P18.2.1.1 Drive 1 0 2221
P18.2.1.2 Drive 2 0 2233
P18.2.1.3 Drive 3 0 2245
P18.2.1.4 Drive 4 0 2257
P18.2.1.5 Drive 5 0 2269

P18.2.2.1 Drive 1 Hz 0 2222
P18.2.2.2 Drive 2 Hz 0 2234
P18.2.2.3 Drive 3 Hz 0 2246
P18.2.2.4 Drive 4 Hz 0 2258
P18.2.2.5 Drive 5 Hz 0 2270

P18.2.3.1 Drive 1 V 0 2223
P18.2.3.2 Drive 2 V 0 2235
P18.2.3.3 Drive 3 V 0 2247
P18.2.3.4 Drive 4 V 0 2259
P18.2.3.5 Drive 5 V 0 2271
Notes

P18.2.4.1 Drive 1 A 0 2224
P18.2.4.2 Drive 2 A 0 2236
P18.2.4.3 Drive 3 A 0 2248
P18.2.4.4 Drive 4 A 0 2260
P18.2.4.5 Drive 5 A 0 2272

P18.2.5.1 Drive 1 % 0 2225
P18.2.5.2 Drive 2 % 0 2237
P18.2.5.3 Drive 3 % 0 2249
P18.2.5.4 Drive 4 % 0 2261
P18.2.5.5 Drive 5 % 0 2273

P18.2.6.1 Drive 1 % 0 2226
P18.2.6.2 Drive 2 % 0 2238
P18.2.6.3 Drive 3 % 0 2250
P18.2.6.4 Drive 4 % 0 2262
P18.2.6.5 Drive 5 % 0 2274

P18.2.7.1 Drive 1 rpm 0 2227
P18.2.7.2 Drive 2 rpm 0 2239
P18.2.7.3 Drive 3 rpm 0 2251
P18.2.7.4 Drive 4 rpm 0 2263
P18.2.7.5 Drive 5 rpm 0 2275

P18.2.8.1 Drive 1 h 0 2228
P18.2.8.2 Drive 2 h 0 2240
P18.2.8.3 Drive 3 h 0 2252
P18.2.8.4 Drive 4 h 0 2264
P18.2.8.5 Drive 5 h 0 2276
Notes

P18.3.1 12 Multi-pump Mode 0 2279 0 = Disabled
P18.3.2 12 Drive ID 0 5 0 2278
1 = Stop
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
1 = Enabled
P18.3.19 2 Run Time Limit 0 300000 h 0 2281
1 = Reset
1 = Interlock Start
2 = Interlock Tout
3 = Interlock Delay
P18.3.23 12 Damper Delay 1 32500 s 5 485
Notes

1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
1 = Time Channel 1
2 = Time Channel 2
3 = Time Channel 3
Notes


1 = BACnet MS/TP
2 = SmartWire-DT
P20.2.2 Slave Address 1 247 1 587
P20.2.3 Baud Rate 1 584 0 = 9600
1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 57600
4 = 115200
1 = Odd
2 = Even
Status 1 = Stopped
2 = Operational
3 = Faulted
1 = Busy
Table 155. Modbus MS/TCP—P20.2

1 = 19200
2 = 38400
3 = 76800
4 = 115200
Address
Notes
Table 155. Modbus MS/TCP—P20.2, continued

1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Sole Master
3 = Baud Rate Fault

1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
1 = Busy
Table 157. SmartWire DT—P20.4

P20.4.2 Baud Rate 0 2141 0 = 125 kBaud
1 = 250 kBaud
Notes

1 = Multi-Pump
2 = Multi-PID
3 = Multi-Purpose
1 = Reload Defaults
2 = Reload Set 1
3 = Reload Set 2
4 = Store Set 1
5 = Store Set 2
6 = Reset
P21.1.4 Up To Keypad 0 620 0 = No
1 = Yes
1 = All Parameters
2 = All, No Motor
3 = App Parameters
P21.1.7 Password 0 9999 0 624
1 = Change Disable
1 = Main Menu
2 = Multi-Monitor
3 = Favorite Menu
P21.1.11 Timeout Time 0 65535 s 30 629
1 = Temperature
2 = Run Follow
3 = Calculate Temp

Version
Version
Notes

1 = Yes

P21.4.1 Real Time Clock 0.0.0.1:1:13 566
1 = EU
2 = US
1 = Reset
Notes
Appendix A—Description of Parameters

On the following pages you will find the parameter descriptions arranged according to
the parameter number.
Some parameter names are followed by a number code indicating the applications in
which the parameter is included. See the list of applications below. The parameter
numbers under which the parameter appears in different applications are also given.
Application Level
1 Standard Application
2 Multi-Pump and Fan Application
3 Multi-PID Application
4 Multi-Purpose Application
Code Modbus ID Parameter Application RO/RW

P1.1 101 Min Frequency 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P1.2 102 Max Frequency 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
These define the frequency limits of the frequency converter. The maximum value
for these parameters is 400 Hz.The minimum frequency has to be below the
maximum frequency level. These will limit other frequency parameter settings.
P1.3 103 Accel Time 1 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The time required for the output frequency to accelerate from zero frequency to
Max frequency (P1.2). When accelerating from other frequency levels, the accel
time will be a fraction of the total accel time.
P1.4 104 Decel Time 1 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The time required for the output frequency to decelerate from Max frequency (P1.2)
to zero frequency. When decelerating from other frequency levels, the decel time
will be a fraction of the total decel time.
Figure 39. Acceleration and Deceleration Time
fout
(Hz)
P1.2
P1.1
P1.1
P1.3 P6.6 t (s)
t1 t2
The values for the acceleration time t1 and the deceleration time t 2 are calculated as follows:
The defined acceleration (P1.3) and deceleration times (P1.4) apply for all changes to
the frequency setpoint value.
If the start-release (FWD, REV) is switched off, the output frequency (fOut) is
immediately set to zero. The motor runs down uncontrolled.
If a controlled run-down is requested (with value from P1.4), parameter P7.10
must be 1.
1 When setting a minimum output frequency (P1.4 greater than 0 Hz), the acceleration and
deceleration time of the drive is reduced to t1 or t2.

P1.5 486 Motor Nom Current 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Motor nominal nameplate full load current. Find this value on the rating plate of the
motor.
Figure 40. Motor Parameters from Ratings Plate
P1.8 P1.5
230/400V 4.0/2.3A
0.75 kW cos 0.67
1410 min –1 50 Hz
P1.7
P1.6 P1.9
P1.6 489 Motor Nom Speed 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Motor nominal nameplate base speed. Find this value on the rating plate of the
motor.
P1.7 490 Motor PF 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Motor nominal nameplate full load power factor. Find this value on the rating plate of
the motor.
P1.8 487 Motor Nom Voltage 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Motor nominal nameplate base voltage. Find this value on the rating plate of the
motor.
P1.9 488 Motor Nom Frequency 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Motor nominal nameplate base frequency. Find this value on the rating plate of the
motor. This parameter sets the Field Weakening Point (P8.4) to the same value.
P1.10 1685 Power Up Local Remote Select 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects on power up what control place the drive goes into. By default, it will
hold the last state that the drive was in when powered down. By selecting Local
or Remote, it will power up in that mode no matter the position it was powered
down in.
0 = Hold Last
1 = Local Control
2 = Remote Control
P1.11 135 Remote1 Control Place 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects where the drive will look for the start command in the remote location.
I/O terminals would be from the digital hardwired inputs. Fieldbus would be a
communication bus. Keypad display will indicate which mode is selected.
P1.12 1695 Local Control Place 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects where the drive will look for the start command in the local location.
I/O terminals would be from the digital hardwired inputs or keypad Start/Stop
buttons. Keypad display will indicate which mode is selected.

P1.13 136 Local Reference 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter determines the reference for Local control location. This value can
be fed from an analog input, keypad, or fieldbus reference signal.
Multi-
Pump Multi- Multi-
Application—Selection Standard and Fan PID Purpose
0 = AI1—analog input on terminals 2–3 ■ ■ ■ ■
2 = Slot A: AI1—analog input on expander board in slot A ■ ■ ■ ■
3 = Slot B: AI1—analog input on expander board in slot B ■ ■ ■ ■
4 = AI1 joystick—analog input on terminals 2–3, used for joystick control ■ ■ ■ ■
6 = Keypad—keypad reference (P1.7.3) ■ ■ ■ ■

7 = Fieldbus Ref—reference sent of communication bus ■ ■ ■ ■
8 = Motor Pot—selects digital inputs for digital inputs to increase/decrease speed — — — ■
9 = Max Frequency—maximum frequency value (P1.1.2) ■ ■ ■ ■
10 = AI1+AI2—sums the analog input values ■ ■ ■ ■
11 = AI1–AI2—subtracts the analog inputs AI1 from AI2 ■ ■ ■ ■

13 = AI1*AI2—multiplies analog inputs AI1 and AI2 ■ ■ ■ ■
14 = AI1 or AI2—selects analog inputs based off of digital input ■ ■ ■ ■
15 = Min (AI1, AI2)—selects analog inputs that have the least value ■ ■ ■ ■
16 = Max (AI1, AI2)—selects analog inputs that have the higher value ■ ■ ■ ■
17 = PID1 Control—selects the PID calculation for output to maintain reference value — ■ ■ ■
P1.14 137 Remote1 Ref 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

This parameter determines the reference for Remote1 control mode. This value
can be fed from an analog input, keypad, or fieldbus reference signal.
Multi-
Pump Multi- Multi-



P1.15 1679 Reverse Enable 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Enables or disables the reverse motor direction.
P2.1 222 AI1 Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Sets the analog input mode for AI1 terminals 2 and 3 for current or voltage. The DIP
switches on control board, left of the keypad, also need to be set. If using the 10 V
supply on Terminal 1 of the DG1, it will require a ground jumper from Terminal 6 to
the AI- input terminal 3 to complete the loop. When doing a current loop with an
external supply, the ground jumper is not required.
P2.2 175 AI1 Signal Range 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
With this parameter, you can select the analog input 1 signal range. 0–100% is equal
to 0 to 10 V, 0–20 mA, or –10 V to 10 V depending on the selection of AI1 Mode.
20–100% is equal to 2 to 10 V, 4–20 mA, or –6 V to 10 V. For selection
“Customized,” see P2.3 and P2.4 to enable a customized signal range.
Figure 41. Analog Input AI Scaling
Output
Frequency
P2.22
P2.1 = Custom
P2.2 = 0
AI2 = 0 – 100%
P2.2 = 1
P2.21
AI2 = 20 – 100% AI2
(Term. 3,4)
0 4 mA 20 mA
P2.3 P2.4
P2.3 176 AI1 Custom Min 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

P2.4 177 AI1 Custom Max 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
These parameters set the analog input signal for any input signal span within
0–100%.
AI1 Custom Min <= AI1 Custom Max.
P2.5 174 AI1 Filter Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
When this parameter is given a value greater than 0, the function that filters out
disturbances from the incoming analog signal is activated.
A long filtering time makes the regulation response slower.
Figure 42. AI1 Signal Filtering
AI
AO
100%
63%
P2.5 AI1 t (s) Notes

1 Analog signal with faults (unfiltered).
P2.15 AI2
2 Filtered analog signal.
P4.4 AO1
3 Filter time constant at 63% of the set value.
P4.11 AO2

P2.6 181 AI1 Signal Invert 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Inverts the reference signal. Maximum reference becomes minimum frequency and
minimum reference becomes maximum frequency.
If this parameter = 0, no inversion of analog Vin signal takes place.
If this parameter = 1, inversion of analog signal takes place.
Figure 43. AI1 No Signal Inversion
Output
Frequency
P2.22
P2.2/2.12 = 0
AI1 = 0 – 100%
P2.2/2.12 = 1
P2.21 AI1 = Custom
AI1
(Term. 2)
0 P2.3/2.13 P2.4/2.14 100%
Figure 44. AI1 Signal Inversion
Output
Frequency
P2.22
P2.2/2.12 = 0
AI1 = 0 – 100%
P2.2/2.12 = 1
AI1 = Custom
P2.21 AI1
(Term. 2)
0 P2.3/2.13 P2.4/2.14 100%
Maximum AI1 signal = minimum set speed.

Minimum AI1 signal = maximum set speed.

P2.7 178 AI1 Joystick Hyst 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter defines the joystick hysteresis between 0 and 20%. When the
joystick is turned from reverse to forward, the output frequency falls linearly to the
selected minimum frequency (joystick in middle position) and stays there until the
joystick is turned toward the forward command. How much the joystick must be
turned to start the increase of the frequency toward the selected maximum
frequency is dependent on the amount of joystick hysteresis defined with this
parameter.
If the value of this parameter is 0, the frequency starts to increase linearly
immediately when the joystick is turned toward the forward command from the
middle position. When the control is changed from forward to reverse, the
frequency follows the same pattern the other way around. See Figure 45.
Figure 45. Example of Joystick Hysteresis
Frequency Reference
Hz REVERSE FORWARD
50% 50%
Reference
Scaling Max A B
P2.22= 70 Hz
From Reverse to Forward

Max Freq.
P1.2 = 50 Hz
From Forward to Reverse
Analog
Min Freq. P1.1 = Input (V/mA)
Ref. Scaling Min (0 – 10V/20 mA)
P2.21 = 0 Hz
P2.3/2.13 P2.4/2.14
= 20% = 90%
Joystick Hysteresis,
P2.7 = 20%
In this example, the value of P1.2.9 (Sleep limit) =0.

P2.8 179 AI1 Sleep Limit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The frequency converter keeps on output min frequency if the AI signal level falls
below the Sleep limit defined within this parameter. This will allow the output to be
shut off after the sleep delay until converter AI signal level rises again when using
the Joystick control.
Figure 46. Example of Sleep Limit Function
Frequency Reference
Hz REVERSE FORWARD
50% 50%
Reference
Scaling Max A
P2.22 = 70 Hz B
From Reverse to Forward
Max Freq.
P1.2 = 50 Hz
START STOP
STOP START
From Forward to Reverse
Analog
Input (V/mA)
Min Freq. P1.1 = (0 – 10V/20 mA)
Ref. Scaling Min
P2.21 = 0 Hz P2.3/2.13 P2.4/2.14
= 20% Sleep Limit
= 90%
P2.7/2.18 = 7%
Joystick Hysteresis,
P1.2.8 = 20%
P2.9 180 AI1 Sleep Delay 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

This parameter defines that the time the analog input signal has to stay under the
Sleep limit determined with parameter P2.9 in order to make the frequency
converter output min frequency.
P2.10 133 AI1 Joystick Offset 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The frequency zero point is the middle of AI range. Joystick offset means how much
the zero point is moved in the forward or reverse direction.
P2.11 223 AI2 Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Sets the analog input mode for AI2 terminals 4 and 5 for current or voltage. The DIP
switches on control board, left of the keypad, also need to be set. If using the 10 V
supply on Terminal 1 of the DG1, it will require a ground jumper from Terminal 6 to
the AI– input terminal 5 to complete the loop. When doing a current loop with an
external supply, the ground jumper is not required.
P2.12 183 AI2 Signal Range 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P2.13 184 AI2 Custom Min 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P2.14 185 AI2 Custom Max 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P2.15 182 AI2 Filter Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P2.16 189 AI2 Signal Invert 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P2.17 186 AI2 Joystick Hyst 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P2.18 187 AI2 Sleep Limit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P2.19 188 AI2 Sleep Delay 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P2.20 134 AI2 Joystick Offset 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
See AI1 parameters.
P2.21 144 AI Ref Scale Min Value 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

P2.22 145 AI Ref Scale Max Value 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
0.00 <= P2.21 <= P2.22 <= 400.00. With values set at 0 scaling will follow the
minimum and maximum frequency values.
Figure 47. With and Without Reference Scaling
Output Output
Frequency Frequency
Max. Frequency P1.2 Max. Frequency P1.2
P2.22 Ref. Scaling Max. Value (P2.22)
P2.21 Analog Analog

Min. Frequency P1.1 Input [V] Min. Frequency P1.1 Input [V]
0 10 0 10
With Reference Scaling With Reference Scaling
(Reference Scaling) (No scaling used [P2.21 = 0])

P3.1 143 Start/Stop Logic 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
For the DI function, we use Terminal programming method to function (TTF), where
there is a fixed input or output to define a certain function for.
0 = P3.2: DI closed contact = start forward P3.3: DI closed contact = start reverse
Figure 48. Start Forward / Start Reverse
FWD Output
Frequency Stop Function
(P7.10) = Coasting
REV
DIN1
DIN2
1 2 3
1 = P3.2: DI closed contact = start /open contact = stop P3.3: DI closed contact =
reverse / open contact = forward
Figure 49. Start, Stop and Reverse
FWD Output Stop Function
Frequency (P7.10) = Coasting
REV
DIN1
DIN2
Notes
1 The first selected direction has the highest priority.
2 When the DIN1 contact opens the direction of rotation starts to change.
3 If Start forward (DIN1) and Start reverse (DIN2) signals are active simultaneously the Start forward
signal (DIN1) has priority.

P3.1 143 2 = P3.2: DI closed contact = start / open contact = stop P3.3: DI closed contact = 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
start enabled / open contact = start disabled and drive stopped if running Motor
direction keeps forward
3 = Three-wire connection (pulse control): P3.2: DI changes from open to closed =
start pulse P3.3: DI changes from closed to open = stop pulse P3.5: DI closed
contact = reverse/ open contact = forward
Figure 50. Start Pulse / Stop Pulse
Output If Start and Stop pulses are

Frequency Stop Function simultaneous the Stop pulse
(P7.10) = Coasting overrides the Start pulse
REV
DIN1
Start
DIN2
Stop
P3.2 190 Start Signal 1 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Signal selection 1 for the start/stop logic listed in P3.1. Different settings: DigiIN:X
indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in
A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
P3.3 191 Start Signal 2 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Signal selection 2 for the start/stop logic listed in P3.1. Different settings: DigiIN:X
P3.4 881 Thermistor Input Sel 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter defines DIN7 and DIN8 as digital input or thermistor input. When this
parameter is enabled, it switches DIN7 and DIN8 to a thermistor input that triggers
at 4.7k ohm.
P3.5 198 Reverse 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Allows for switching the direction of the motor when using 3 wire start/stop logic.
Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
Contact Open = Forward direction.
Contact Close = Reverse direction.
P3.6 192 Ext. Fault 1 NO 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Allows for external input causing drive to fault. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates
on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X. The
description of the fault can be changed in P3.52.
Closed contact = external fault.
Open contact = no external fault.

P3.7 193 Ext. Fault 1 NO 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Allows for external input causing drive to fault. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates
description of the fault can be changed in P3.52.
Closed contact = no external fault.
Open contact = external fault.
P3.8 200 Fault Reset 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Allows for external fault reset input. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board
terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
DI change from open contact to closed contact: reset fault.
P3.9 194 Run Enable 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Allows for safety start input that is required along with start command for frequency
converter to turn on output. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal
inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X
indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
Closed contact = Start of motor enabled.
Open contact = Start of motor disabled.
P3.10 205 Preset Speed B0 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Preset bit select inputs to select preset speed reference values. Validating three
digital inputs will allow for seven preset speeds to be obtained. When switching
between inputs it will follow the acceleration and deceleration time. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in
B slot, or Timer Channel X.
Figure 51. Activation of Fixed Frequencies
f
(Hz)
15 Hz
10 Hz
5 Hz
0 Hz
t (s)
DI3 B0 B0 B0
DI4 B1 B1
DI1 FWD
Fixed Frequency
Input (Binary) Fixed Frequency
B0 B1 B2 (Factory setting)
X — — Preset Speed 1, P12.1 = 5 Hz
— X — Preset Speed 2, P12.2 = 10 Hz
X X — Preset Speed 3, P12.3 = 15 Hz
— — X Preset Speed 4, P12.4 = 20 Hz
X — X Preset Speed 5, P12.5 = 25 Hz
— X X Preset Speed 6, P12.6 = 30 Hz
X X X Preset Speed 7, P12.7 = 35 Hz
P3.13 550 PID1 Control Enable 2, 3, 4 RW

Allows for activating PID1 control mode when it is set as a reference place in
P1.1.13 or P1.1.14. If the input is not enabled, when starting the drive with PID1
Controller set as the reference, the drive output will not start. Different settings:
DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board
inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer
Channel X
Contact Close: Enables PID 1 control mode.
P3.14 553 PID2 Control Enable 3, 4 RW
Allows for activating PID2 control mode. If the input is not enabled, when starting
the drive with PID2 Controller set as the reference, the drive output will not start.
Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X
Contact Close: Enables PID 2 control mode.

P3.15 195 Accel/Decel Time Set 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects between accel/decel time 1 and accel/decel time 2. Different settings:
Channel X.
Closed contact = 2nd set of acc/dec time applied.
Open contact = 1st set of acc/dec time applied.
P3.16 201 Accel/Decel Prohibit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Disables the ability to change speed, even if the reference signal changes. If this
input is enabled, the output stays at the value it was at before the input was
enabled. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs,
DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot, DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X
Closed contact: drive output frequency cannot rise or fall, it keeps on current output.
P3.17 215 No Access To Param 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Locks out the ability to change parameters when this input is enabled. This can be
used with the password protection. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board
Closed contact: all writable parameters cannot be edited.
P3.18 203 Accel Pot Value 4 RW
Motor Potentiometer is set for a reference. When this input is enabled, it increases
the reference value until the contact opens. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on
board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot,
Closed contact: Potentiometer value keeps on rising.
P3.19 204 Decel Pot Value 4 RW
Motor Potentiometer is set for a reference. When this input is enabled, it decreases
the reference value until the contact opens. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on
Closed contact: Potentiometer value keeps on falling.
P3.20 216 Reset Pot Zero 4 RW
When using the Motor Potentiometer as the reference signal, it sets the reference
value to zero when the contact closes. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on
Closed contact: Potentiometer value reset to zero.
P3.21 196 Remote Control 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection allows for external control panel to control frequency converters control
place. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
Closed Contact: force to remote control.
P3.22 197 Local Control 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection allows for external control panel to control frequency converters control
place. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
Closed contact: force to local control.

P3.23 209 Remote1/2 Select 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection allows for switching between Remote control 1 (P1.11 and P1.14) and
Remote control 2 (P7.1 and P7.2). This switches the control and reference locations.
Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on-board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
indicates optional board inputs in A slot. DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board
Closed contact: remote2 is selected as control source.
Open contact: remote1 is selected as control source.
P3.24 217 Second Motor Para Select 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection allows for switching between motor parameter set 1 (P1 Group) and
set 2 (P16 Group). Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs,
optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X.
Closed contact: the 2nd motor parameters are applied.
P3.25 218 Bypass Start 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection allows for switching between bypass and drive modes. When this input is
enabled, the bypass output contactor is enabled to bypass the drive. When disabled,
this relay opens. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs,
Closed contact: switch to bypass.
Open contact: switch to drive.
P3.26 202 DC Brake Enable 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection enables DC brake on a closed contact. When enabled, this will cause the
drive to inject DC voltage into the motor to assist in stopping. Different settings:
Channel X.
Closed contact: DC brake function is enabled.
P3.27 219 Smoke Mode 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection enables the smoke purge preset speed to be enabled. Different settings:
Channel X.
Closed contact: drive is in smoke purge mode.
P3.28 220 Fire Mode 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection enables drive into fire mode where faults will be ignored and preset
speeds are given for reference commands to the drive. These are selectable in P15
group. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X
Closed contact: drive is in fire mode. Ignores all the faults.
P3.29 221 Fire Mode Ref Select 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection allows for switching between fire mode speed reference 1 and reference
2 which is set via P15.4 and P15.5. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board
Closed contact: drive output reference frequency selection 2.

P3.30 351 PID1 Set Point Sel 2, 3, 4 RW
P3.31 352 PID2 Set Point Sel 3, 4 RW
Selection allows for selecting between Setpoint 1 and setpoint 2 when in the PID
control mode. Depending on the PID Controller you are using, this will allow for
multiple setpoints. Can be set to DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs,
optional board inputs in B slot, or Timer Channel X
Closed contact: setpoint2 is selected for PID1.
Open contact: setpoint1 is selected for PID1.
P3.32 199 Jog Enable 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection enables the jog frequency reference and starts the drive to slowly advance
the system. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs,
Closed contact: drive is under jog mode.
P3.33 224 Start Timer 1 2, 3, 4 RW
P3.34 225 Start Timer 2 2, 3, 4 RW
P3.35 226 Start Timer 3 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection enables the timer functions to begin counting. Different settings: DigiIN:X
Closed contact: Timer1,Timer2 or Timer3 will be started.
P3.36 208 AI Ref Source Select 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selection switches between AI1 and AI2 reference signals that are located on the
control board. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs,
Closed contact: AI2 is selected for reference source.
Open contact: AI1 is selected for reference source.
P3.37 210 Motor Interlock 1 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects inputs that are allowed to verify aux motors are connected to allow them to
run. If inputs are disabled, the drive will see this as a motor not connected and skip
over the motor in the booster/auto-change sequence. Different settings: DigiIN:X
Closed contact: motor interlock signal activated.
Open contact: motor interlock signal unactivated.
P3.42 747 Emergency Stop 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Function disables the frequency converter from running the motor. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
Contact Open: Disables the ability for the motor to Run.
Contact Close: Enables the ability for the motor to Run.

P3.43 1246 BypassOverLoad 2, 3, 4 RW
Function faults frequency converter when using an overload block input. The relay
would be fed into this input to fault the drive. Different settings: DigiIN:X indicates
Closed contact: motor is over load in bypass.
Use TTF method to realize the above functions.
P3.44 2118 Fire Mode Reverse 2, 3, 4 RW
Function allows motor to run in reverse when fire mode input is enabled. Different
settings: DigiIN:X indicates on-board terminal inputs, DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in A slot and DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in
B slot or Timer Channel X.
P3.45 2206 2nd Start Stop Logic 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This function allows for a additional location for a remote control wire station can
be used to give a run command. DigiIN:X indicates on-board terminal inputs,
DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates optional board inputs in A slot and DigiIN:B:IOX:X indicates
optional board inputs in B slot or Timer Channel X.
P3.46 2207 2nd Start Signal 1 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The 2nd Signal selection 1 for the start/stop logic listed in P3.45. Can be set to
Channel X
P3.47 2208 2nd Start Signal 2 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The 2nd Signal selection 2 for the start/stop logic listed in P3.45. Can be set to
Channel X
P3.48 2293 Ext. Fault 2 NO 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Allows for external input causing drive to fault. Can be set to DigiIN:X indicates on
description on the fault can be changed in P3.53.
P3.49 2294 Ext. Fault 2 NC 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P3.50 2295 Ext. Fault 3 NO 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P3.51 2296 Ext. Fault 3 NC 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

P3.52 2297 Ext, Fault 1 Text 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter allows for the text to be changed when using external
Fault 1 NO or NC.
0 = External Fault
1 = Vibration Cut Out
2 = High Motor Temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
Fault 2 NO or NC.
0 = External Fault
2 = High Motor Temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
Fault 3 NO or NC.
0 = External Fault
2 = High Motor Temp
3 = Low Pressure
4 = High Pressure
5 = Low Water
7 = Run Enable
9 = Smoke Detect
10 = Seal Leakage
P3.55 2312 Parameter Set1/Set 2 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Allows for the drive to select between the stored parameter set1 or set2, this
requires saving parameters to the stored sets via P21.1.3. DigiIN:A:IOX:X indicates

P4.1 227 AO1 Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the analog output mode for AO1 current or voltage. There are internal
relays to perform the switching of the signal between mA or V.
P4.2 146 AO1 Function 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the desired function for the AO1 terminal 22.
Multi-
Pump Multi- Multi-
Application—Function Standard and Fan PID Purpose
0 = Not used—no function ■ ■ ■ ■
1 = O/P Frequency—frequency output to motor (0–Fmax) ■ ■ ■ ■
2 = Frequency Ref—reference frequency (Fmin–Fmax) ■ ■ ■ ■
3 = Motor Speed—motor speed (0–Motor Nominal Speed) ■ ■ ■ ■
4 = Motor Current—output motor current (0–Inmotor) ■ ■ ■ ■
5 = Motor Torque—motor torque (0–Tnmotor) ■ ■ ■ ■
6 = Motor Power—calculated motor power (0–Pnmotor) ■ ■ ■ ■

7 = Motor Voltage—output motor voltage (0–Unmotor) ■ ■ ■ ■
8 = DC Bus Voltage—DC bus voltage level (0–1000 V) ■ ■ ■ ■
9 = PID1 Setpoint—PID setpoint value (setpoint min–setpoint max) — ■ — ■
10 = PID1 Feedback1—PID actual value 1 (feedback1 min–feedback1 max) — ■ — ■
11 = PID1 Feedback2—PID actual 2 value (feedback2 min–feedback2 max) — ■ — ■

12 = PID1 Control Error Value—PID error value — ■ — ■
13 = PID1 Control O/P—PID controller output — ■ — ■
14 = PID2 Setpoint—PID setpoint value (setpoint min–setpoint max) — — ■ ■
15 = PID2 Feedback1—PID actual value 1 (feedback1 min–feedback1 max) — — ■ ■
16 = PID2 Feedback2—PID actual 2 value (feedback2 min–feedback2 max) — — ■ ■

17 = PID2 Control Error Value—PID error value — — ■ ■
18 = PID2 Control O/P—PID controller output — — ■ ■
19 = AI1—Analog input 1 ■ ■ ■ ■
20 = AI2—Analog input 2 ■ ■ ■ ■
21 = O/P Frequency—Output frequency (–2 to +2x nominal frequency) ■ ■ ■ ■

22 = Motor Torque—Motor output torque (–2 to +2x Tnmotor) ■ ■ ■ ■
23 = Motor Power—Motor calculated power (–2 to +2x Pnmotor) ■ ■ ■ ■
24 = PT100 Temp—Thermistor input temperature ■ ■ ■ ■
P4.3 149 AO1 Minimum 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Defines the signal minimum to be either 0 mA or 4 mA (AO1 mode = 0–20 mA); 0 V
or 2 V (AO1 mode = 0–10 V). See Figure 53 for details.
0 = Set minimum value to 0 V/0 mA
1 = Set minimum value to 2 V/4 mA

P4.4 147 AO1 Filter Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the filtering time for the analog output signal. A higher number will add
more filtering time on the output signal. Setting this parameter value to 0.00 will
deactivate filtering.
Figure 52. Analog Output Filtering
AI
AO
100%
63%
P2.5 AI1 t (s) Notes

P2.15 AI2 Analog signal with faults (unﬁltered).
P4.4 AO1 Filtered analog signal.
P4.11 AO2 Filter time constant at 63% of the set value.
P4.5 150 AO1 Scale 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Scaling factor for analog output function from 10% to 1000%. Adjusting this value
will either extend or shrink the scale on the analog signal from 0–10 V / 0–20 mA or
2–10 V / 4–20 mA.
Figure 53. Analog Output Scaling
Analog
Output P4.5
Current P4.12 = 200% P4.5
20 mA P4.12 = 100%
12 mA P4.5
P4.12 = 50%
10 mA
P4.3 Max. Value

P4.10 = 1 of Signal
4 mA Selected
by P4.3
P4.3
P4.10
P4.10 = 0
0 mA 0 0.5 1.0

P4.6 148 AO1 Inversion 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Inverts the analog output signal. Normally, 0 V / 0 mA / 2 V / 4 mA = 0% and
10 V / 20 mA = 100%. When inverted, 0 V / 0 mA / 2 V / 4 mA = 100% and
10 V / 20 mA = 0%.
Maximum output signal = Minimum set value.
Minimum output signal = Maximum set value.
Figure 54. Analog Output Invert
Analog Output Current
20 mA
12 mA P4.5
10 mA P4.12 = 50%
P4.5
4 mA P4.12 = 100%
P4.5/P4.12 Selected with
= 200% P4.3/P4.10
0 mA
0 0.5 1.0
P4.7 375 AO1 Offset 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Add –100.0 to 100.0% to the analog output minimum value to add in an additional
offset scale factor.
P4.8 228 AO2 Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the analog output mode for AO2 current or voltage. There are internal relays
to perform the switching of the signal between mA or V.
P4.9 229 AO2 Function 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the desired function for the AO1 terminal 24.
P4.10 232 AO2 Minimum 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P4.11 230 AO2 Filter Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P4.12 233 AO2 Scale 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P4.13 231 AO2 Inversion 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P4.14 234 AO2 Offset 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
See AO1 parameters.
P5.1 151 DO1 Function 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P5.2 152 RO1 Function 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P5.3 153 RO2 Function 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

P5.4 538 RO3 Function 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Multi-
Pump Multi- Multi-
Application Function Standard and Fan PID Purpose
0 = Not used Not operational ■ ■ ■ ■
1 = Ready Frequency converter is ready for operations ■ ■ ■ ■
2 = Run Frequency converter is running motor ■ ■ ■ ■
3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred ■ ■ ■ ■
4 = Fault inverted A fault trip has not occurred ■ ■ ■ ■
5 = Warning Warning exists in frequency converter ■ ■ ■ ■
6 = Reverse Reverse command has been activated ■ ■ ■ ■
7 = At speed Output frequency has reached reference ■ ■ ■ ■
8 = Zero frequency Motor output is at zero frequency ■ ■ ■ ■
9 = Frequency Limit1 supervision Frequency limit1 achieved ■ ■ ■ ■
10 = Frequency Limit2 supervision Frequency limit2 achieved ■ ■ ■ ■
11 = PID1 supervision PID1 controller level achieved ■ ■ ■ ■
12 = PID2 supervision PID2 controller level achieved ■ ■ ■ ■
13 = Over heat warning Drive over heat has occurred ■ ■ ■ ■
14 = Over current regular Over current controller activated ■ ■ ■ ■
15 = Over voltage regular Over voltage controller activated ■ ■ ■ ■
16 = Under voltage regular Under voltage controller activated ■ ■ ■ ■
17 = 4 mA fault 4 mA reference fault occurred ■ ■ ■ ■
18 = External brake External brake activated — — — ■
19 = External brake inverted External brake control inverted — — — ■
20 = Torque limit supervision Torque limit value achieved ■ ■ ■ ■
21 = Reference limit supervision Reference limit achieved ■ ■ ■ ■

22 = Control from IO Control place I/O is activated ■ ■ ■ ■
23 = Unrequired rotation direction Active direction is different than reference ■ ■ ■ ■
direction
24 = Thermal fault Thermal fault has occurred ■ ■ ■ ■
25 = Fire mode Fire mode is activated ■ ■ ■ ■
26 = Bypass running Bypass mode is activated ■ ■ ■ ■
27 = External fault External fault has occurred ■ ■ ■ ■
28 = Remote control Remote control place is activated ■ ■ ■ ■
29 = Jog speed Drive is in jog mode ■ ■ ■ ■
30 = Motor thermal protection Motor calculated temperature fault activated ■ ■ ■ ■
31 = Fieldbus input1 Controlled by FB control word ■ ■ ■ ■
35 = Damper control Damper control input is activated ■ ■ ■ ■
36 = Timer1 status Timer1 activated ■ ■ ■ ■
39 = Emergency stop Emergency stop input activated, drive faulted ■ ■ ■ ■
40 = Power limit supervision Power limit value achieved ■ ■ ■ ■
41 = Temperature limit supervision Temperature limit value achieved ■ ■ ■ ■
42 = Analog input supervision Analog limit value achieved ■ ■ ■ ■
43 = Motor1 control Auxiliary motor1 activated — ■ ■ ■

48 = Logic fulfilled Logic function is activated — — — ■
49 = PID1 sleep PID1 controller sleep mode active — ■ ■ ■
50 = PID2 sleep PID2 controller sleep mode active — — ■ ■

P5.4 538 RO3 Function, continued 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Setting Value Signal Content

51 = Motor Current 1 Supv Motor current supervision value active
52 = Motor Current 2 Supv Motor current supervision value active
53 = Second AI Limit Supv Analog input supervision active
54 = DC Charge Switch Close DC bus is charged
55 = Preheat Active Preheat Control mode is activated
56 = Cold Weather Active Cold Weather mode is activated
P5.5 154 Freq Limit 1 Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Selects whether the frequency supervision controller functions as a low limit, high
limit, or enables an external brake control relay.
0 = No supervision
1 = Low limit supervision
2 = High limit supervision
3 = Brake-on control (Application 4 only)
P5.6 155 Freq Limit 1 Supv Val. 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the frequency value supervised by P5.5.
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (P5.6), this function generates
a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via the relay outputs RO1 or RO2 or
RO3 depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
Figure 55. Supervision Function
f [Hz] P5.5 = 2
P5.6
Example: 21 RO1 21 RO1 21 RO1
22 RO1 22 RO1 22 RO1
23 RO1 23 RO1 23 RO1
P5.7 157 Freq Limit 2 Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Selects whether the frequency supervision controller functions as a low limit, high
limit, or enables/disables an external brake control relay.
0 = No limit
3 = Brake-off control (Application 4 only)
4 = Brake-on/-off control (Application 4 only)
P5.8 158 Freq Limit 2 Supv Val. 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the frequency value supervised by P5.7. See Figure 55.

P5.9 159 Torque Limit Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects whether the torque supervision controller functions as a low limit, high limit,
or disables a mechanical brake (torque proofing).
0 = No limit
3 = Brake-off control (Application 4 only)
P5.10 160 Torque Limit Supv Val. 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Set here the torque value to be supervised by P5.9.
P5.11 161 Ref Limit Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects whether the reference supervision controller functions as a low limit or
high limit.
0 = No supervision
P5.12 162 Ref Limit Supv Val 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The frequency value to be supervised by P5.11.
P5.13 163 Ext Brake Off Delay 4 RW
P5.14 164 Ext Brake On Delay 4 RW
The function of the external brake can be time delayed to provide ample time to
enable/disable an external brake module. See Figure 56.
The brake control signal can be programmed via digital output DO1 or via one of the
relay outputs RO1, RO2 and RO3; see P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
Figure 56. External Brake Control
a) b)
tOFF = P5.13 tON = P5.14 tOFF = P5.13 tON = P5.14
External External
BRAKE: OFF DO1/RO1/ BRAKE: OFF DO1/RO1/
ON RO2/RO3 ON RO2/RO3
DIN1: RUN FWD DIN1: START

STOP PULSE
DIN2: RUN REV DIN2: STOP

STOP t PULSE
t
a) Start/Stop Logic Selection, P3.1 = 0, 1 or 2

b) Start/Stop Logic Selection, P3.1 = 3
P5.15 165 Temp Limit Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects whether the temperature supervision controller functions as a low limit or
high limit of the drive temperature.
0 = No supervision
P5.16 166 Temp Limit Supv Val 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This temperature value is supervised by P5.15.
If the temperature of the frequency converter unit falls below or exceeds the set
limit (P5.16), this function generates a warning message via the digital output DO1
or via a relay output RO1, RO2 or RO3 depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2,
P5.3, and P5.4.

P5.17 167 Power Limit Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects whether the power supervision controller functions as a low limit or
high limit.
0 = No supervision
P5.18 168 Power Limit Supv Val 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This power value is supervised by P5.17.
If the calculated power value falls below or exceeds the set limit (P5.18), this
function generates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay
output RO1, RO2 or RO3, depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
P5.19 170 AI Supv Select 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects analog signal to use for the AI supervision.
0 = Analog reference from AI1 (terminals 2 and 3, e.g., potentiometer)
1 = Analog reference from AI2 (terminals 4 and 5, e.g., transducer)
P5.20 171 AI Limit Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects whether the analog input supervision controller functions as a low limit or
high limit.
0 = No supervision
P5.21 172 AI Limit Supv Val 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The value of the selected analog input to be supervised by P5.20.
If the value of the selected analog input goes under/over the set limit (P5.21), this
function generates a warning message through the digital output or the relay
outputs depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
P5.22 1346 PID1 Superv Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
P5.23 1347 PID1 Superv Upper Limit 2, 3, 4 RW
P5.24 1349 PID1 Superv Lower Limit 2, 3, 4 RW
P5.25 1351 PID1 Superv Delay 2, 3, 4 RW
P5.26 1408 PID2 Superv Enable 3, 4 RW
P5.27 1409 PID2 Superv Upper Limit 3, 4 RW
P5.28 1411 PID2 Superv Lower Limit 3, 4 RW
P5.29 1413 PID2 Superv Delay 3, 4 RW
Upper and lower limits around the reference are set. When the actual value goes
above or below these, a counter starts counting up toward the Delay. When the
actual value is within the allowed area, the same counter counts down instead. After
the delay time it will turn on an relay output value. These can be fed into a digital
input for pressure level faults.
P5.30 2111 RO1 On Delay 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Delay time for RO1 to turn on.
P5.31 2112 RO1 Off Delay 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Delay time for RO1 to turn off.
P5.32 2113 RO2 On Delay 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P5.33 2114 RO2 Off Delay 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P5.34 2115 RO3 On Delay 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

P5.35 2116 RO3 Off Delay 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P5.36 2117 RO3 Invert 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Inverts the output function of RO3 to be normally closed instead of normally open on
the Form A relay.
1 = Not Inverted
2 = Inverted
P5.37 2189 Motor Current 1 Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects how the frequency converter functions based off the motor current limit
value setting. The drive monitors the active motor current and will enable itself
based off the supervision value.
0 = No supervision
P5.38 2190 Motor Current 1 Supv Value 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The value of the selected motor current value to be monitored by P5.37.
function generates a warning message through the digital output or the relay outputs
depending on the settings of P5.1 to P5.2, P5.3, and P5.4.
P5.39 2191 Motor Current 2 Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects how the frequency converter functions based off the motor current limit
value setting. The drive monitors the active motor current and will enable itself
based off the supervision value.
0 = No supervision
P5.40 2192 Motor Current 2 Supv Value 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The value of the selected motor current value to be monitored by P5.39.
P5.41 2193 Second AI Supv Select 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects analog signal to use for the analog input supervision
0 = Analog reference from AI1 (terminals 2 and 3, e.g., potentiometer)
1 = Analog reference from AI2 (terminals 4 and 5, e.g., transducer)
P5.42 2194 Second AI Limit Supv 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects how the frequency converter functions based off the analog input limit value
setting
0 = No supervision
P5.43 2195 Second AI Limit Supv Val 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The value of the selected analog input to be supervised by P5.42.
P5.44 2196 Motor Current 1 Supv Hyst 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the motor current 1 supervision
enables and disables itself.
P5.45 2197 Motor Current 2 Supv Hyst 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the motor current 2 supervision

P5.46 2198 AI Supv Hysteresis 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the AI supervision enables and
disables itself.
P5.47 2199 Second AI Supv Hysteresis 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the AI supervision enables and
disables itself.
P5.48 2200 Frequency Limit 1 Supv Hysteresis 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the Output Frequency supervision
P5.49 2201 Frequency Limit 2 Supv Hysteresis 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the Output Frequency supervision
P5.50 2202 Torque Limit Supv Hysteresis 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the Torque supervision enables and
disables itself.
P5.51 2203 Ref Limit Supv Hysteresis 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the Reference limit supervision
P5.52 2204 Temp Limit Supv Hysteresis 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the Temp limit supervision enables
and disables itself.
P5.53 2205 Power Limit Supv Hysteresis 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This value selects the bandwidth between when the Power limit supervision enables
and disables itself.
P6.1 751 Logic Function Select 4 RW
The logic function enables you to link both parameters P6.2(A) and P6.3 (B) logically
with each other. Different settings: AND—indicating both being active then enable
the logic, OR—if one or both inputs are active then it will enabled the logic, XOR—if
any one of the inputs are active the logic is enabled but if both inputs are the same
state it disables the logic.
The result (LOG) can then be assigned to the digital outputs DO, RO1, RO2 and
RO3.
0 = AND
1 = OR
2 = XOR
P6.2 752 Logic Operation Input A 4 RW
Input A for Logic function calculation defined in P6.1.
P6.3 753 Logic Operation Input B 4 RW
Input B for Logic function calculation defined in P6.1.
P7.1 138 Remote 2 Control Place 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects where the drive will look for the 2nd start command. I/O terminals would be
from the Digital hardwired inputs. Fieldbus would be a communication bus. Keypad
will indicate what mode is selected. Digital input will select between control place 1
and control place 2.

P7.2 139 Remote 2 Reference 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects what frequency reference source to look at when in the Remote 2 control
mode.
Multi-
Pump Multi- Multi-


P7.3 141 Keypad Reference 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

The frequency reference can be adjusted from the keypad with this parameter. This
parameter is linked to R1.12 Keypad reference in the operate menu.
P7.4 116 Keypad Direction 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
0 = Forward: The rotation of the motor is forward or clockwise direction when the
keypad is the active control place.
1 = Reverse: The rotation of the motor is reversed or counter-clockwise direction
when the keypad is the active control place.
P7.5 114 Keypad Stop 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
To make the STOP button a “hotspot” that always stops the drive regardless of the
selected control place. Set the value of this parameter to Always Enabled for being
used in local and remote. Enable—Keypad operation activates the stop button only
in keypad mode or the local control place.
P7.6 117 Jog Reference 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the jogging speed set point. This speed is selected by the digital input
programmed for Jog Speed. When enabled, the drive starts and ramps to this
speed. The drive stops when the input is removed.
This parameter’s value is automatically limited between minimum and maximum
frequency (P1.1.1 and P1.1.2).
P7.7 156 Motor Pot Ramp Time 4 RW
Defines the speed of change of the motor potentiometer reference value.
P7.8 169 Motor Pot Ref Reset 4 RW
Defines how the motor potentiometer reference signal is handled on shutting down
frequency converter output or powering down the frequency converter.
0 = No reset—reference stays at last setting
1 = Memory reset in stop and power down—reference resets to 0 when drive is
stopped or the power is cycled to the drive
2 = Memory reset in power down—reference resets to 0 when drive is powered
down only

P7.9 252 Start Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
0 = Ramp: The frequency converter starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set
reference frequency within the set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting
friction may cause prolonged acceleration times.)
1 = Flying start: The frequency converter is able to start into a running motor by
applying a small voltage to the motor to search for the frequency corresponding
to the speed the motor is running at. Searching starts from the maximum
frequency toward the actual frequency until the correct value is detected.
Thereafter, the output frequency will be increased/decreased to the set
reference value according to the set acceleration/deceleration parameters
Use this mode if the motor is coasting when the start command is given, with the
flying start.
P7.10 253 Stop Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
0 = Coasting: The motor coasts to a halt without any control from the frequency
converter after the Stop command. The motor slows based off the interia loss
1 = Ramp: After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated
according to the set deceleration parameters. If the regenerated energy is high
and a faster deceleration is required, it may be necessary to use an external
braking resistor for faster deceleration
Enabled Normal stop: Ramp/Run
Disable stop: Coasting
P7.11 247 Ramp 1 Shape 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P7.12 248 Ramp 2 Shape 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The start and end of the acceleration and deceleration ramps can be smoothed with
these parameters. Setting a value of 0.0 gives a linear ramp shape that causes
acceleration and deceleration to react immediately to the changes in the reference
signal.
Setting a value from 0.1 to 10 seconds for this parameter produces an S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration at the start and stop of the slope. The acceleration time is
determined with P1.3 and P1.4 or P7.13 and P7.14.
Figure 57. Acceleration/Deceleration (S-shaped)
Hz
P1.3, P1.4
(P7.13, P7.14)
P7.11 (P7.12)
P7.11 (P7.12)
P7.13 249 Accel Time 2 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

P7.14 250 Decel Time 2 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to accelerate
from the zero frequency to the set maximum frequency (P1.2). These parameters
provide the possibility to set two different acceleration/deceleration time sets for
one application. The active set can be selected with the programmable digital input.
P7.15 256 Skip F1 Low Lim 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P7.16 257 Skip F1 High Lim 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

P7.17 258 Skip F2 Low Lim 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P7.19 260 Skip F3 Low Lim 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
In some systems it may be necessary to avoid certain frequencies because of
mechanical resonance problems. With these parameters, limits are set for the “skip
frequency” regions. The frequency converter will skip the set frequencies, ramp
time will be the same. See Figure 58.
Figure 58. Example of Skip Frequency Area Setting
Output
Frequency
(Hz)
P7.15 P7.16
P7.17 P7.18
P7.19 P7.20
Reference (Hz)
P7.21 264 PH Accel/Decel Ramp 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Defines the acceleration/deceleration time when the output frequency is between
the selected prohibit frequency range limits. The ramping speed (selected
acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2) is multiplied with this factor. e.g., value 0.1
makes the acceleration time 10 times shorter than outside the prohibit frequency
range limits.
Figure 59. Ramp Speed Scaling between Skip Frequencies
fout (Hz)
P7.21 = 0.2
P7.16
(P7.18; P7.20)
P7.15
(P7.17; P7.19) P7.21 = 1.2
Time (s)
P7.22 267 Power Loss Function 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

This enables the drive to reduce output voltage to the motor to keep the drive up as
long as possible.
1 = Enable power loss function
0 = Disable power loss function
P7.23 268 Power Loss Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Allowable power loss max time before the drive shuts down. If AC input voltage
recovers before this time setting, drive shall continue to operate.

P7.24 2121 Currency 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Sets the currency used for energy saving calculator.
0=$
1 = GBP
2 = Eur
3 = JPY
4 = Rs
5 = R$
6 = Fr
7 = Kr
P7.25 2122 Energy Cost 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Local energy cost per kWh in the drives area.
P7.26 2123 Data Type 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the format to view energy savings. The drive takes four recordings in an
hour and calculates the average based off this setting. The savings are compared to
the cost to run an across the line starter for the same load.
0 = Cumulative
1 = Daily Avg
2 = Weekly Avg
3 = Monthly Avg
4 = Yearly Avg
P7.27 2124 Energy Savings Reset 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Resets the energy calculation.
P8.1 287 Motor Ctrl Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
0 = Frequency control: Motor is controlled by giving a frequency reference to it.
Voltage reference is calculated from scalar V/Hz ratio according to
preprogrammed curve (output frequency resolution = 0.01 Hz). The frequency
reference can be from I/O terminal, keypad, or communication bus.
1 = Speed control: Motor is controlled by giving a frequency reference to it with slip
compensation. Voltage reference is calculated from scalar V/Hz ratio according
to preprogrammed curve (output frequency resolution = 0.01 Hz). The speed
reference can be from I/O terminal, keypad, or communication bus (accuracy
±0.5%).
5 = Speed control (open loop): Similar to the standard Speed Control mode, but it
internally calculates for the amount of slip feedback from the motor. Requires
running a motor identification to perform the calculations.
6 = Torque control (open loop): Motor is controlled based on a torque reference
given to the drive. Then, based on the motor load, the drive will maintain that
torque level. Requires running a motor identification to perform the calculations.
P8.2 107 Current Limit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter determines the maximum motor current allowed from the frequency
converter. The parameter value range differs from size to size. Once the motor
current hits this level, it goes into the current controller and tries to limit the output
to drop this current.

P8.3 109 V/Hz optimization 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Automatic torque boost
The voltage to the motor changes automatically, which makes the motor produce
sufficient torque to start and run at low frequencies. The voltage increase depends
on the motor type and power. Automatic torque boost can be used in applications
where starting torque due to starting friction is high, e.g., in conveyors.
Example:
What changes are required to start the load from 0 Hz?
First set the motor nominal values (Parameter group P1).
Option 1: Activate the Automatic torque boost.
Option 2: Programmable V/Hz curve.
To obtain the required torque, the zero point voltage and midpoint voltage/frequency (in
parameter group P8) need to be set, so that the motor can draw enough current at the
low frequencies. First set parameter P8.4 to Programmable V/Hz curve (value 2).
Increase the zero point voltage P8.9 to get enough current at zero speed. Then
set the midpoint voltage P8.8 to 100% and the midpoint frequency P8.7 to value
P8.8/100%*P1.9.
Note: In high torque—low speed applications—it is likely that the motor will
overheat. If the motor has to run a prolonged time under these conditions, special
attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use external cooling for the motor if the
temperature tends to rise too high.

P8.4 108 V/Hz Ratio 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Linear
0 = The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency in the constant flux
area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point where the nominal voltage is
supplied to the motor. A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque
applications. This default setting should be used if there is no special need
for another setting.
Squared
1 = The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve form with the
frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point where the nominal
voltage is supplied to the motor. The motor runs under magnetized below the
field weakening point and produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A
squared V/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand of the
load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g., in centrifugal fans and
pumps.
Figure 60. Linear and Squared Change of Motor Voltage
U[V]
Un
P8.5 Default: Nominal Field Weakening
Voltage of the Motor Point
Linear
Squared
Default: Nominal
Frequency of the
Motor
f [Hz]
Programmable V/Hz curve

2 = The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points. These points are
the zero frequency voltage, midpoint and field weakening point. A
programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the other settings do not satisfy the
needs of the application. When running the Motor Identification, this parameter
gets set by default along with the values below for the V/Hz curve and the
resistance information of the motor.
Figure 61. Programmable V/Hz Curve
U[V]
Un
P8.6 Default: Nominal Field Weakening
Voltage of the Motor Point
P8.8
(Default 100%) Default: Nominal
Frequency of the
P8.9 Motor
(Default 0%) f[Hz]
P8.7 P8.5
(Default 5 Hz)
Linear with flux optimization

3 = The frequency converter starts to search for the minimum motor current in order
to save energy and lower the disturbance level and the noise. This function can
be used in applications with constant motor load, such as fans, pumps, etc.

P8.5 289 Field Weakening Point 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The field weakening point is the output frequency at which the output voltage
reaches the set (P8.6) maximum value. This value is usually determined by the
motor nameplate value. If the motor’s specs were supplied, it can be further
adjusted.
P8.6 290 Voltage at FWP 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Above the frequency at the field weakening point, the output voltage remains at the
set maximum value. Below the frequency at the field weakening point, the output
voltage depends on the setting of the V/Hz curve parameters. See P8.3, P8.4, P8.6
and P8.9.
When the parameters P1.8 and P1.9 (nominal voltage and nominal frequency of
the motor) are set, the parameters P8.5 and P8.6 are automatically set to the
corresponding values. If you need different values for the field weakening point and
the maximum output voltage, change these parameters after setting P1.8 and P1.9.
P8.7 291 V/Hz Mid Freq 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with P8.4, this parameter defines
the middle point frequency of the curve. This value can be set anywhere between 0
and the FWP to have a different V/Hz ramp. If set to the FWP, it will provide the max
voltage all the way up the curve. See Figure 61.
P8.8 292 V/Hz Mid Volt 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with the P8.4, this parameter
defines the middle point voltage of the curve. This value can be set anywhere
between the zero frequency voltage and the FWP voltage. This can either have
a different ramp above and below this point or allow for maximum voltage. See
Figure 61.
P8.9 293 Zero Frequency Volt 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with the P8.4, this parameter
defines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. When putting this value above 0%,
additional voltage is given. In some cases, by putting this value too high, it can cause
the motor to be oversaturated. See Figure 61.
P8.10 288 Switching Frequency 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter sets the frequency of the pulse width modulation. Higher switching
frequencies leads to a cleaner current sine wave, while lower frequencies result in a
choppier sine wave.
Motor noise can be minimized using a high switching frequency, but the amount of
heat dissipation increases. Increasing the switching frequency reduces the capacity
of the frequency converter unit.
For protection against thermal overload, the switching frequency automatically is
reduced in the fact that the ambient temperature is high as well as high load
currents.
P8.11 1665 Sine Filter Enable 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Enables the frequency converter to have a sine filter connected to the output motor
leads. When this is connected, motor output will be adjusted to reflect this. This also
enables the drive to have a fixed switching frequency when it reaches motor
thermal protection.
P8.12 294 Overvoltage Control 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
These parameters allow the overvoltage controllers to be switched out of operation.
This may be useful, for example, if the main supply voltage varies more than –15%
to +10% and the application will not tolerate this overvoltage. In this case, the
regulator controls the output frequency taking the supply fluctuations into account.
0 = Controller switched off
1 = Controller switched on
P8.13 298 Load Drooping 4 RW
The drooping function enables speed drop as a function of load. This parameter sets
that amount corresponding to the nominal torque of the motor. This is typically used
in sharing of loads with multiple VFDs.

P8.14 299 Identification 4 RW
With this parameter, the drive will identify the motor and adjust tuning parameters
to improve starting torque and open loop current control. Upon running this
operation it will be active until test is performed and then set back to 0. Once
completed, it will set the V/Hz curve to correspond with resistance values obtained
and provide optimized motor control.
0 = Not active
1 = Identification only stator resistor
2 = Identification with run
3 = Identification no run
P8.15 1574 Neg Frequency Limit 4 RW
Frequency limit in the negative direction.
P8.16 1576 Pos Frequency Limit 4 RW
Frequency limit in the positive direction.
P8.17 1585 Frequency Ramp Out Filter Time Constant 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Filter time used when ramping the drive to a new reference frequency.
P8.18 1591 Speed Error Filter Time Constant 4 RW
Speed control filter time in open loop speed control mode.
P8.19 1592 Speed Error Band Stop Frequency 4 RW
When in stop, the speed error for initializing the speed loop control.
P8.20 1593 Speed Control Kp 4 RW
Open loop speed control gain.
P8.21 1594 Speed Control Ti 4 RW
Open loop speed control integral time.
P8.22 1595 Speed Control Kp at Field Weakening 4 RW
Open loop speed control gain at Field Weakening Point.
P8.23 1596 Speed Control Kp Below F0 4 RW
Open loop speed control gain below 0 Hz.
P8.24 1597 Speed Control F0 4 RW
Open loop speed control at frequency 0.
P8.25 1598 Speed Control F1 4 RW
Open loop speed control at frequency 1.
P8.26 1599 Speed Control Kp Below T0 4 RW

Open loop speed gain below torque 0.

P8.27 1600 Speed Control T0 4 RW
Open loop speed torque 0.
P8.28 1601 Speed Control Kp Filter Time Constant 4 RW
Open loop speed control gain filter time.
P8.29 1602 Motor Torque Limit 4 RW
Torque limit setting in open loop torque control mode.
P8.30 1603 Generator Torque Limit 4 RW
Torque limit setting for generator.
P8.31 1604 Torque Limit Forward 4 RW
Torque limit setting in forward direction.
P8.32 1605 Torque Limit Reverse 4 RW
Torque limit setting in reverse direction.
P8.33 1607 Motor Power Limit 4 RW
Motor power limit setting in open loop torque control mode.
P8.34 1608 Generator Power Limit 4 RW
Generator power limit setting in open loop torque control mode.
P8.35 1611 Acc Compensation Time Constant 4 RW
Acceleration compensation time.
P8.36 1612 Acc Compensation Filter Time Constant 4 RW
Acceleration compensation filter time.
P8.37 1620 Flux Reference 4 RW
Reference selection for the amount of flux to output to the motor when using
advanced programming.
P8.38 1621 Stop State Magnetization 4 RW
Magnetization current % level when performing advanced programming of motor
identification.
P8.39 1622 Start Boost Rise Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Acceleration time used with auto torque boost. Limits the amount of time the boost
is enabled.
P8.40 1623 Flux Current Ramp Time 4 RW
Time to use the flux ramp level when advanced motor control is needed.
P8.41 1624 Zero Speed Start Time 4 RW
Zero speed delay time when starting the motor.
P8.42 1625 Zero Speed Stop Time 4 RW
Zero speed delay time when stopping the motor.
P8.43 1630 Droop Control Filter Time Constant 4 RW
Filter time when using droop control.
P8.44 1631 Start Torque Selection 4 RW
Selects where the startup torque reference comes from (either Start Memory,
Torque Reference, and Start Torque FWD/REV).
P8.45 1632 Start Memory Start 4 RW
Torque value is stored in memory. If you look at P8.48, you can select where the
torque on startup is given from. This is a preset value for both forward and reverse if
both are required to be equal.
P8.46 1633 Start Torque Forward 4 RW
Selects the amount of starting torque in the Forward direction.
P8.47 1634 Start Torque Reverse 4 RW
Selects the amount of starting torque Reverse direction.

P8.48 1635 Start Torque Actual 4 RO
Actual start torque.
P8.49 1667 Startup Torque Time 4 RW
This is the amount of time that the startup torque boost is active in either forward or
reverse during startup.
P8.50 771 Stator Resistor 4 RW
Motor stator resistor real value. This value is the stator winding resistance of the
windings in the motor. Value is measured when performing Identification (P8.14).
P8.51 772 Rotor Resistor 4 RW
Motor rotor resistor real value. This value is the rotor resistance of the motor. Value
is measured when performing Identification (P8.14).
P8.52 773 Leak Inductance 4 RW
Motor leakage inductance real value. This value is the amount of magnetic
inductance that does not link to a winding in the motor. Value is measured when
performing Identification (P8.14).
P8.53 774 Mutual Inductance 4 RW
Motor mutual inductance real value. This value is the amount of inductance between
2 sets of windings in the motor. Value is measured when performing Identification
(P8.14).
P8.54 775 Excitation Current 4 RW
Motor no-load current real value. This value is the amount of electrical current
required to generate a rotating magnetic field in the motor. Value is measured when
performing Identification (P8.14).
P9.1 306 4 mA Input Fault 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
A warning or a fault action and message is generated if the 4–20 mA reference
signal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA for 5 seconds or below 0.5 mA for 0.5
seconds. The information can also be programmed into digital output DO1 or relay
outputs RO1 and RO2.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
2 = Warning, the frequency from 10 seconds back is set as reference
3 = Warning, the Preset Frequency P9.2 is set as reference
4 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to P7.10
5 = Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
P9.2 331 4 mA Fault Freq 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
When 4 mA fault happens, the output frequency of drive goes to this preset speed
when P9.1 = 3.
P9.3 307 External Fault 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signal in
the programmable digital inputs (DIN3 is defaulted). The information can also be
programmed into digital output DO1 and into relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.4 332 Input Phase Fault 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The input phase supervision ensures that the input phases of the frequency
converter have approximately equal currents.
0 = No response
1 = Warning

P9.5 330 Undervoltage Fault Resp 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Frequency converter monitors DC Bus Voltage. If it drops below the set level, the
drive will respond according to this setting.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.6 308 OutputPhaseFault 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Output phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have equal
currents, if phases are 5% difference from one another frequency converter will
respond corresponding to this setting.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.7 309 Ground Fault 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Earth fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.
P9.44 allows for setting the allowable ground current level. The overcurrent
protection is always working and protects the frequency converter from earth faults
with high currents. Frequency Converter will correspond the setting below.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.8 310 Motor Therm Prot 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
If tripping is selected, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage based off the%
calculated motor temperature. The calculated motor temp is based off the initial
power values of the drive and the monitoring values as the drive is running.
Deactivating this protection, i.e., setting parameter to 0, will reset the thermal stage
of the motor to 0%.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to ID506

P9.9 311 Motor Therm F0 Current 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The current can be set between 0–150.0% x InMotor. This parameter sets the value
for thermal current at zero frequency. See Figure 62.
The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor. If
an external fan is used, this parameter can be set to 90% (or even higher).
Note: The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate data, P1.5 (nominal
current of the motor), not the drive’s nominal output current. The motor’s nominal
current is the current that the motor can withstand in direct on-line use without
being overheated.
If you change the parameter Nominal current of motor, this parameter is
automatically restored to the default value.
Setting this parameter does not affect the maximum output current of the drive,
which is determined by P1.16 alone.
Figure 62. Motor Thermal Current IT Curve
P
Cooling
Overload Area
100% I
T
P9.9 = 40%
0 fn f

P9.10 312 Motor Thermal Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This time can be set between 1 and 200 minutes.
This is the thermal time constant of the motor; the larger the motor, the longer the
time constant. The time constant is the time within which the calculated thermal
stage has reached 63% of its final value.
The motor thermal time is specific to the motor design and it varies between
different motor manufacturers.
If the motor’s t6–time (t6 is the time in seconds the motor can safely operate at six
times the rated current) is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the time
constant parameter can be set based on it. As a rule of thumb, the motor thermal
time constant in minutes is equal to 2 x t6. If the drive is in stop stage, the time
constant is internally increased to three times the set parameter value. The cooling
in the stop stage is based on convection and the time constant is increased. See
Figure 63.
Figure 63. Motor Temperature Calculation
Motor
Temperature
Trip Area
105%
Motor Fault/Warning
Current P9.8
I/IT
Time Constant T*
Motor Temperature Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)
Time
* Changes by motor size and adjusted with P9.10.
P9.11 313 Stall Protection 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection. It protects the motor from short
time overload situations like a stalled shaft. This is customer selectable based off of
current level, frequency level and time.
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast

P9.12 314 Stall Current Limit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The current can be set to 0.1–InMotor*2. For a stall stage to occur, the current must
have exceeded this limit. See Figure 64. The software does not allow entering a
greater value than InMotor*2. If P1.5, nominal motor current is changed, this
parameter is automatically restored to the default value (IL).
Figure 64. Stall Characteristics Settings
Stall Area
P9.12
P9.14 f
P9.13 315 Stall Time Limit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

This time can be set between 1.0 and 120.0s.
This is the maximum time allowed for a stall stage. The stall time is counted by an
internal up/down counter based off the current being above the limit setting. If
the stall time counter value goes above this limit the protection will cause a trip
(see P9.11).
Figure 65. Stall Time Count
Stall Time Counter
Trip Area
P9.13
Trip/Warning
P9.11
Time
Stall
No Stall
P9.14 316 Stall Frequency Limit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

The frequency can be set between 1–fmax (P1.1.2).
For a stall state to occur, the output frequency must have remained below this limit
and above the current limit for the stall time.

P9.15 317 Underload Protection 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
If the motor torque drops below the Fnom and F0 torque levels for the time limit, the
underload protection is enabled. Deactivating the protection by setting the
parameter to zero will reset the underload time counter to zero.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.16 318 Underload Fnom Torque 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The torque limit can be set between 10.0–150.0% x TnMotor.
This parameter gives the value for the minimum torque allowed when the output
frequency is at or above the field weakening point. See Figure 66.
If you change P1.5, nominal motor current, this parameter is automatically restored
to the default value.
Figure 66. Setting of Minimum Load
Torque
P9.16
P9.17
Underload Area
f
5 Hz Field Weakening
Point P8.4
P9.17 319 Underload F0 Torque 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

The torque limit can be set between 5.0–150.0% x TnMotor.
This parameter gives value for the minimum torque allowed with zero frequency.
See Figure 67.
If you change the value of P1.5, nominal motor current, this parameter is
automatically restored to the default value.

P9.18 320 Underload Time Limit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This time can be set between 2.0s and 600.0s.
This is the maximum time allowed for an underload state to exist. An internal up/
down counter counts the accumulated underload time. If the underload counter
value goes above this limit, the protection will cause a trip according to P9.15. If the
drive is stopped, the underload counter is reset to zero. See Figure 67.
Figure 67. Underload Time Counter Function
Underload
Time Counter
Trip Area
Trip/ Warning
P0.15
Time
Underload
No Underload
P9.19 333 Thermistor Fault Response 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Setting the parameter to 0 will deactivate the protection. If motor thermistors input
is enabled, it requires enabling the fault condition. If used with motor thermistors in
the winding of the motor or an external sensor, P9.8 Motor Thermal Protection can
be deactivated.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.20 750 Line Start Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Determines the response of frequency converter starting motor on power cycle
if I/O run command is still active.
0 = Response I/O command when power is on. No response to I/O commands
when control source is changed to I/O location
1 = Do not respond I/O command when power is on. No response to I/O commands
when control source is changed to I/O location
2 = Response I/O command when power is on. Respond to I/O command when
control source is changed to I/O location
3 = Do not respond I/O command when power is on. Respond to I/O command
when control sources are changed to I/O location
P9.21 334 Fieldbus Fault Response 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This sets the response mode for the fieldbus fault when a fieldbus board is used and
communication is lost between the PLC and communication port. See P9.19.
P9.22 335 OPTCard Fault Response 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This sets the response mode for a board slot fault caused by a missing or failed
option board not communicating to the Central Processor. See P9.19.
P9.23 1564 Unit Under Temp Prot 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This protection sets the response to a low frequency converter temperature on the
heat sink. See P9.19.

P9.24 321 Wait Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the time before the frequency converter tries to automatically restart the
motor after a specific fault condition has been received. Auto restart faults are listed
in P9.27 to P9.33.
P9.25 322 Trial Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Sets the amount of time after the Wait Time (P9.24) that the drive uses for
attempting to restart after a fault. After this time has run out without the alarm
resetting, the drive will fault. See Figure 68.
Figure 68. Example of Automatic Restarts with Two Restarts
Wait Time Wait Time Wait Time
Par. P9.23 Par. P9.23 Par. P9.23
Fault Trigger
Motor Stop Signal
Restart 1 Restart 2
Motor Start Signal
Supervision Trial Time

Par. P9.24
Fault State Active
RESET/Fault Reset
Auto Function: (Trials = 2)
P9.27 to P9.32 determine the maximum number of automatic restarts during the
trial time set by P9.25. The time count starts from the first autorestart. If the number
of faults occurring during the trial time exceeds the values of P9.27 to P9.32 the
fault state becomes active. Otherwise the fault is cleared after the trial time has
elapsed and the next fault starts the trial time count again.
If a single fault remains during the trial time, a fault state is true.
P9.26 323 Start Function 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The Start function for Automatic restart is selected with this parameter. The
parameter defines the start mode upon an auto restart condition:
0 = Start with ramp
1 = Flying start
2 = Start according to P7.9
P9.27 324 Undervoltage Attempts 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter determines how many automatic restarts can be made during the
trial time set by P9.25 after an undervoltage trip.
0 = No automatic restart
>0 = Number of automatic restarts after overvoltage fault trip. The fault is reset and
the drive is started automatically after the DC-link voltage has returned to the
normal level
P9.28 325 Overvoltage Attempts 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
trial
Time set by P9.25 after an overvoltage trip.
0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage fault trip
>0 = Number of automatic restarts after overvoltage fault trip. The fault is reset and
the drive is started automatically after the DC-link voltage has returned to the
normal level

P9.29 326 Overcurrent Attempts 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
trial time set by P9.25.
Note: An IGBT temperature fault, Saturation Fault and Overcurrent Faults are
included as part of this fault.
0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent fault trip
>0 = Number of automatic restarts after an overcurrent trip, saturation trip or IGBT
temperature fault
P9.30 327 4 mA Fault Attempts 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
0 = No automatic restart after reference fault trip
>0 = Number of automatic restarts after the analog current signal (4–20 mA) has
returned to the normal level (>4 mA)
P9.31 329 Motor Temp Fault Attempts 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
0 = No automatic restart after Motor temperature fault trip
>0 = Number of automatic restarts after the motor temperature has returned to its
normal level
P9.32 328 External Fault Attempts 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
0 = No automatic restart after External fault trip
>0 = Number of automatic restarts after External fault trip
P9.33 336 Underload Attempts 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
0 = No automatic restart after an Underload fault trip
>0 = Number of automatic restarts after an Underload fault trip
P9.34 955 RTC Fault 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
RTC (Real Time Clock) fault protection ensures the real time display is correct, the
interval and timer function can run normally.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.35 337 PT100 Fault Response 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
PT100 Thermistor Protection is used with motor PT100 thermistors and the input
option board. It is used to fault the frequency converter if motor has reached the set
temperature fault level.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.36 1256 Replace Battery Fault Response 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Sets how the frequency converter responds to a low voltage on the Real Time Clock
battery.
0 = No response
1 = Warning

P9.37 1257 Replace Fan Fault Response 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Replace Fan Fault will show when the fan life is less than 2 months; remind user to
replace the fan. The time is based on the power on time of the drive.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.38 1678 IP Address Conflict Response 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Indicates there is a conflict in the IP address assigned, meaning there are multiple
devices with the same IP address assigned.
0 = No response
1 = Warning
P9.39 2126 Cold Weather Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
With this parameter, you are able to enable the cold weather function of the drive,
causing the frequency converter’s under temp limit to drop from –10°C to –30°C.
This then enables a warmup feature when the frequency converter is between
–30°C and –20°C. The motor, when given a run command, will turn on for the Cold
Weather Timeout (ID2128) and output the Cold Weather Voltage (ID2127) at 0.5 Hz
to allow the motor to warm up. If it does not warm up above –20°C, after that the
time frequency converter will fault on Under temp fault. If the frequency converter
does go above –20°C, output will begin to follow reference.
0 = No
1 = Yes
P9.40 2127 Cold Weather Voltage Level 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
With this parameter, you are able to select the % of the motor voltage that is
output to the motor when in the cold weather warmup period.
P9.41 2128 Cold Weather Time Out 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
With this parameter, you are able to select the time limit that the frequency
converter will run in the warmup period.
P9.42 2129 Cold Weather Password 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This password allows access to override the under temperature fault protection. This
parameter is seen by pressing the left and right soft keys on the keypad. Password
should be set to 32866 to access P9.43. This value gets reset on cycle of power.
P9.43 2130 Drive Under Temperature Fault Override 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
With the password set to the correct value, this parameter is enabled and will give
the ability to override the under temp fault. This function gets reset when power is
cycled.
P9.44 2158 Ground Fault Limit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Sets the level of the ground fault protection. This protection is based off the amount
of leakage current that is seen to ground on the output of the drive.
P9.45 2157 Keypad Comm Fault Response 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter defines the function of the keypad communication response in the
case the keypad is removed.
0 = No Action
1 = Warning
2 = Fault
3 = Fault, Coast

P9.46 2159 Preheat Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter enables/disables the preheat function. With this enabled, it tracks the
preheat temp source and if it falls below the preheat enter temp, it enables current
to flow through the motor to prevent condensation.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
P9.47 2160 Preheat Temp Source 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the source of where the temperature is coming from. Can be set to either
the drive heat sink temperature or the PT100 sensor temperature.
0 = Drive heat sink temperature
1 = PT100 Temperature sensor in motor
P9.48 2161 Preheat Enter Temp 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Temperature when the preheat is enabled. The drive goes into a run state to allow
the preheat voltage to flow through the motor and create current.
P9.49 2162 Preheat Quit Temp 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Temperature when the preheat is disabled. The drive goes into a stop state if the
temperature is above this rating.
P9.50 2163 Preheat output Voltage 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Voltage level outputted to the motor when the drive is in the Preheat operation
mode. This is a percentage of the motor nameplate voltage.
P10.1 1294 PID1 Control Gain 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the gain of the PID Controller. It adjusts the slope of the speed increase
according to the initial of the load. If this value is set to 100% a change of 10% in the
error value causes the controller output to change 10%.
P10.2 1295 PID1 Control ITime 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the integration time of the PID Controller. Over the time, the integral time
contributes to the deviation between the reference and feedback signal. If this value
is set to 1.00 sec, a change of 10% in the error value causes the controller output to
change by 10.00%/s. With value set to 0.0, frequency converter operates as PD
controller.
P10.3 1296 PID1Control DTime 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the derivation time of the PID Controller. This value will adjust the rate of
change on the feedback signal. If this value is set to 1.00 sec, a change of %10 in
error value during 1.00 sec causes the control output to change by %10.00. If value
is set to 0.0, frequency converter operates as PI controller
P10.4 1297 PID1 Process Unit 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the unit type for PID Feedback.
P10.5 1298 PID1 Process Unit Min 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the minimum process unit Value.
P10.6 1300 PID1 Process Unit Min 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the minimum process unit Value.
P10.7 1302 PID1 Process Unit Decimal 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the amount of decimal places in process unit Value.
P10.8 1303 PID1 Error Inversion 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the way the process value output reacts to the feedback signal.
0 = Normal, If feedback is less than setpoint, PID controller output increases
1 = Inverted, If feedback is less than setpoint, PID controller output decreases
P10.9 1304 PID1 Dead Band 2, 3, 4 RW
PID Dead band around setpoint in process units. This is the band where no actions
occur to prevent oscillation or repeated activation/deactivation of the controller. The
PID output is locked if the feedback stays within the deadband area for a delay.

P10.10 1306 PID1 Dead Band Delay 2, 3, 4 RW
If the PID process value goes out of the Dead Band area for the desired time delay,
the controller will re-initialize and try to level out again.
P10.11 1307 PID1 Keypad Set Point 1 2, 3, 4 RW
This is the stored keypad set point for use of the PID feedback to match.
P10.12 1309 PID1 Keypad Set Point 2 2, 3, 4 RW
This is the stored keypad set point for use of the PID feedback to match.
P10.13 1311 PID1 Ramp Time 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the rising and falling ramp times for changes in the process value.
P10.14 1312 PID1 Set Point 1 Source 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines source of the setpoint. This can be an internal preset value, keypad setpoint,
analog signal or Fieldbus message.
P10.15 1313 PID1 Set Point 1 Min 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines Minimum Value.
P10.16 1314 PID1 Set Point 1 Max 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines Maximum Value.
P10.17 1315 PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
Enable PID Set Point Sleep mode. This function will disable the output when the
frequency drops below the sleep frequency for the sleep delay time. The output
re-enables when feedback rises above the wakeup level.
P10.18 1316 PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq 2, 3, 4 RW
Drive goes to sleep mode when the output frequency drops below this limit for a
time greater than that defined by parameter Sleep delay.
P10.19 1317 PID1 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay 2, 3, 4 RW
The minimum amount of time the frequency has to remain below the sleep level
before the drive output drops out.
P10.20 1318 PID1 Set Point 1 Wake-Up Level 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the level that the PID feedback value must exceed to re-enable drive output.
Uses selected process units.
P10.21 1320 PID1 Set Point 1 Boost 2, 3, 4 RW
The setpoint can be boosted via a multiplier value
P10.22 1321 PID1 Set Point 2 Source 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines source of the setpoint. This can be an internal preset value, keypad setpoint,
analog signal or Fieldbus message.
P10.23 1322 PID1 Set Point 2 Min 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines Minimum Value.
P10.24 1323 PID1 Set Point 2 Max 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines Maximum Value.
P10.25 1324 PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
Enable PID sleep function. This function will disable the output when the frequency
drops below the sleep frequency for the sleep delay time. The output re-enables
when feedback rises above the wakeup level.
P10.26 1325 PID1 Set Point2 Sleep Freq 2, 3, 4 RW
Drive goes to sleep mode when the output frequency drops below this limit for a
time greater than that defined by parameter Sleep delay.
P10.27 1326 PID1 Set Point 2 Sleep Delay 2, 3, 4 RW
The minimum amount of time the frequency has to remain below the sleep level
before the output drops out.
P10.28 1327 PID1 Set Point 2 Wake-Up Level 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the level that the PID feedback value must exceed to re-enable drive
output.. Uses selected process units.

P10.29 1329 PID1 Set Point 2 Boost 2, 3, 4 RW
The setpoint can be boosted via a multiplier value.
P10.30 1330 PID1 Feedback Function 2, 3, 4 RW
Choose a single signal used as feedback.This parameter allows for doing math
functions with 2 sources.
P10.31 1331 PID1 Feedback Gain 2, 3, 4 RW
Define Gain associated with feedback signal from the measuring device.
P10.32 1332 PID1 Feedback 1 Source 2, 3, 4 RW
Define where feedback signal is being fed into the drive, via analog or Fieldbus
data value..
P10.33 1333 PID1 Feedback 1 Min 2, 3, 4 RW
Minimum Unit Value for the feedback 1 signal.
P10.34 1334 PID1 Feedback 1 Max 2, 3, 4 RW
Maximum Unit Value for the feedback 1 signal.
P10.35 1335 PID1 Feedback 2 Source 2, 3, 4 RW
Define where feedback signal is being fed into the drive, via analog or Fieldbus
data value.
P10.36 1336 PID1 Feedback 2 Min 2, 3, 4 RW
Minimum Unit Value for the Feedback 2 signal.
P10.37 1337 PID1 Feedback 2 Max 2, 3, 4 RW
Maximum Unit Value for the Feedback 2 signal.
P10.38 1338 PID1 Feedforward Func 2, 3, 4 RW
Choose a single signal used as feed forward command. This is used to account for
major disturbances that the Processor does not see via the Feedback.
P10.39 1339 PID1 Feedforward Gain 2, 3, 4 RW
Define feed forward gain control level.
P10.40 1340 PID1 Feedforward 1 Source 2, 3, 4 RW
Define where feed forward signal is fed from. This can either be an analog signal or
Fieldbus process value.
P10.41 1341 PID1 Feedforward 1 Min 2, 3, 4 RW
Define feed forward Minimum Value.
P10.42 1342 PID1 Feedforward 1 Max 2, 3, 4 RW
Define feed forward Maximum Unit Value.
P10.43 1343 PID1 Feedforward 2 Source 2, 3, 4 RW
Define where feed forward signal is fed from. This can either be an analog signal or
Fieldbus process value.
P10.44 1344 PID1 Feedforward 2 Min 2, 3, 4 RW
Define feed forward2 Minimum Unit Value.
P10.45 1345 PID1 Feedforward 2 Max 2, 3, 4 RW
Define feed forward2 Maximum Unit Value.
P10.46 1352 PID1 Set Point 1 Comp Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
Enables pressure loss compensation for setpoint 1 value.
P10.47 1353 PID1 Set Point 1 Comp Max 2, 3, 4 RW
Value added proportionally to the frequency. Setpoint compensation = comp max *
(output freq–min freq)/(max freq–min freq)
P10.48 1354 PID1 Set Point 2 Comp Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
Enables pressure loss compensation for setpoint 2 signal value.

P10.49 1355 PID1 Set Point 2 Comp Max 2, 3, 4 RW
Value added proportionally to the frequency, setpoint compensation = comp max *
(output freq–min freq)/(max freq–min freq).
Procedure for setting up PID Application:
Initially set PID Gain (P10.1) to 0.0% and set the PID I Time (P10.2) to 20 sec. Start
the frequency converter and verify if the setpoint is reached quickly while
maintaining stable operation of the system. If not increase the PID Gain (P10.1) until
the drive speed oscillates constantly. After this occurs reduce the PID Gain (P10.1)
slightly to reduce the oscillation. From here take the value found for PID Gain (P10.1)
to 0.5 times that value and reduce the PID I time (P10.2) until the feedback signal
oscillates again. Increase the PID I time (P10.2) until the oscillation stops, with that
value take it times 1.2 and use that value for the PID I time (P10.2). If signal noise is
seen at high frequency increase the filter time varies to filter the signal. If further
tuning is required refer to the table showing what is affected.
Figure 69. Setting up PID Application
Response Rise Time Overshoot Settling Time Steady State Error

Increase PID Gain Decrease Rise Increases Overshoot Not Affected Decreases Error
Increase PID1 Time Decrease Rise Increases Overshoot Increases Setting Eliminates Error
Increase PID0 Time Not Affected Decreases Overshoot Decreases Setting Not Affected
Rise Time—the time required for the output to rise 90% of the desired level for
the first time.
Overshoot—the difference between the peak level and the steady state level.
Setting Time—time required for the system to converge to its steady state.
Steady State Error—the difference between the steady state level and the desired
output level.
Peak
Time
0.50
0.45
Overshoot
0.40
Desired Steady State

Amplitude 0.35
Error
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
Settling Time
0.05
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Rise Time
P11.1 1356 PID2 Control Gain 3, 4 RW

See P10.1.
P11.2 1357 PID2 Control ITime 3, 4 RW
See P10.2.
P11.3 1358 PID2 Control DTime 3, 4 RW
See P10.3.

P11.4 1359 PID2 Process Unit 3, 4 RW
See P10.4.
P11.5 1360 PID2 Process Unit Min 3, 4 RW
See P10.5.
P11.6 1362 PID2 Process Unit Max 3, 4 RW
See P10.6.
P11.7 1364 PID2 Process Unit Decimal 3, 4 RW
See P10.7.
P11.8 1365 PID2 Error Inversion 3, 4 RW
See P10.8.
P11.9 1366 PID2 Dead Band 3, 4 RW
See P10.9.
P11.10 1368 PID2 Dead Band Delay 3, 4 RW
See P10.10.
P11.11 1369 PID2 Keypad Set Point 1 3, 4 RW
See P10.11.
P11.12 1371 PID2 Keypad Set Point 2 3, 4 RW
See P10.12.
P11.13 1373 PID2 Ramp Time 3, 4 RW
See P10.13.
P11.14 1374 PID2 Set Point 1 Source 3, 4 RW
See P10.14.
P11.15 1375 PID2 Set Point 1 Min 3, 4 RW
See P10.15.
P11.16 1376 PID2 Set Point 1 Max 3, 4 RW
See P10.16.
P11.17 1377 PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Enable 3, 4 RW
See P10.17.
P11.18 1378 PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Freq 3, 4 RW
See P10.18.
P11.19 1379 PID2 Set Point 1 Sleep Delay 3, 4 RW
See P10.19.
P11.20 1380 PID2 Set Point 1 Wake-Up Level 3, 4 RW
See P10.20.
P11.21 1382 PID2 Set Point 1 Boost 3, 4 RW
See P10.21.
P11.22 1383 PID2 Set Point 2 Source 3, 4 RW
See P10.22.
P11.23 1384 PID2 Set Point 2 Min 3, 4 RW
See P10.23.
P11.24 1385 PID2 Set Point 2 Max 3, 4 RW
See P10.24.
P11.25 1386 PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Enable 3, 4 RW
See P10.25.
P11.26 1387 PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Freq 3, 4 RW
See P10.26.

P11.27 1388 PID2 Set Point 2 Sleep Delay 3, 4 RW
See P10.27.
P11.28 1389 PID2 Set Point 2 Wake-Up Level 3, 4 RW
See P10.28.
P11.29 1391 PID2 Set Point 2 Boost 3, 4 RW
See P10.29.
P11.30 1392 PID2 Feedback Func 3, 4 RW
See P10.30.
P11.31 1393 PID2 Feedback Gain 3, 4 RW
See P10.31.
P11.32 1394 PID2 Feedback 1 Source 3, 4 RW
See P10.32.
P11.33 1395 PID2 Feedback 1 Min 3, 4 RW
See P10.33.
P11.34 1396 PID2 Feedback 1 Max 3, 4 RW
See P10.34.
P11.35 1397 PID2 Feedback 2 Source 3, 4 RW
See P10.35.
P11.36 1398 PID2 Feedback 2 Min 3, 4 RW
See P10.36.
P11.37 1399 PID2 Feedback 2 Max 3, 4 RW
See P10.37.
P11.38 1400 PID2 Feedforward Func 3, 4 RW
See P10.38.
P11.39 1401 PID2 Feedforward Gain 3, 4 RW
See P10.39.
P11.40 1402 PID2 Feedforward 1 Source 3, 4 RW
See P10.40.
P11.41 1403 PID2 Feedforward 1 Min 3, 4 RW
See P10.41.
P11.42 1404 PID2 Feedforward 1 Max 3, 4 RW
See P10.42.
P11.43 1405 PID2 Feedforward 2 Source 3, 4 RW
See P10.43.
P11.44 1406 PID2 Feedforward 2 Min 3, 4 RW
See P10.44.
P11.45 1407 PID2 Feedforward 2 Max 3, 4 RW
See P10.45.
P11.46 1414 PID2 Set Point 1 Comp Enable 3, 4 RW
See P10.46.
P11.47 1415 PID2 Set Point 1 Comp Max 3, 4 RW
See P10.47.
P11.48 1416 PID2 Set Point 2 Comp Enable 3, 4 RW
See P10.48.
P11.49 1417 PID2 Set Point 2 Comp Max 3, 4 RW
See P10.49.

P12.1 105 Preset Speed 1 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P12.2 106 Preset Speed 2 1, 2, 3, 4 RW

Parameter values are automatically limited between the minimum and maximum
frequencies (P1.1, P1.2). Sets the desired frequency as referenced when input is
applied.
P12.3 118 Preset Speed 3 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P12.4 119 Preset Speed 4 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P12.5 120 Preset Speed 5 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P12.6 121 Preset Speed 6 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
P12.7 122 Preset Speed 7 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
These parameter values define the Multi-step speeds selected. These parameter
values are automatically limited between minimum and maximum frequency (P1.1
and P1.2).
P13.1 295 Torque Limit 4 RW
With this parameter you can set the torque limit control between 0.0–400.0% when
in open loop torque control.
P13.2 303 Torque Ref Sel 4 RW
Defines the source for torque reference.
0 = Not used
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = SlotA:AI1
4 = SlotB:AI1
5 = AI1 joystick
6 = AI2 joystick
7 = Keypad Torque Ref
8 = Fieldbus Ref
P13.3 782 Keypad Torque Ref 4 RW
When Keypad is selected for torque reference setpoint, the value can be
entered here.
P13.4 304 Torque Ref Max 4 RW
P13.5 305 Torque Ref Min 4 RW
Scales the minimum and maximum level for the torque ref to be between –300.0
and 300.0%.
P13.6 1666 Torque Control Freq Max 4 RW
When in torque control mode, this parameter defines the speed window the drive
will operate in.
0 = NegFreqMax…PosFreqMax
1 = –|FreqRampOut|…+|FreqRampOut|
2 = NegFreqMax…FreqRampout(MIN)
3 = FreqRampOut..PosFreqMax(MAX)
4 = FreqRampOut+-WindowPos/NegWidth
5 = 0…FreqRampOUt(pos or neg direction)
6 = FreqRamp+-WindowPos/Neg/PosOff/NegOff
P13.7 1636 Window Pos Width 4 RW
Frequency in positive direction when drive goes into Speed control from Torque
Control mode. This references back to P13.6 setting for the Frequency Max setpoint
option 4 or 6.

P13.8 1637 Window Neg Width 4 RW
Frequency in negative direction when drive goes into Speed control from Torque
option 4 or 6.
P13.9 1638 Window Pos Off Limit 4 RW
Frequency in positive direction when drive comes out of Speed control from Torque
option 6.
P13.10 1639 Window Neg Off Limit 4 RW
Frequency in negative direction when drive comes out of Speed control from Torque
option 6.
P13.11 1640 Torque Reference Filter TC 4 RW
Torque reference filter time.
P13.12 1606 Pull Out Torque 4 RW
Startup torque level in percentage.
P13.13 1667 Startup Torque Time 4 RW
Startup torque time limit for starting torque level in open loop torque control mode.
P13.14 1684 Stop State Magnetization Time 4 RW
Motor stop magnetization time upon stopping in open loop torque control mode.
P14.1 254 DC-Brake Current 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the current level injected into the motor during DC-braking.
P14.2 263 Start DC-Brake Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
DC-brake is activated when the start command is given. This parameter defines the
time the drive injects DC into the motor before ramping to reference level. This is to
stop motors that are potentially spinning before a run command is given.
P14.3 262 Stop DC-Brake Frequency 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The output frequency at which the DC-braking is applied on stopping. See Figure 70.

P14.4 255 Stop DC-Brake Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Determines the length of DC braking when stopping. The function of the DC-brake
depends on the stop function, P7.10, used when Ramping. When frequency drops
below P14.3, it enables DC injection braking to stop motor.
>0.0 DC-brake is not used
>0.0 DC-brake is in use and its function depends on the Stop function, (P7.10). The
DC-braking time is determined with this parameter
Par. P7.10 = 0; Stop function = Coasting:
After the stop command, the motor coasts to a stop without control of the
frequency converter.
With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortest possible
time, without using an optional external braking resistor.
The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC-braking starts. If
the frequency is ≥ the nominal frequency of the motor, the set value of parameter
P14.4 determines the braking time. When the frequency is ≤10% of the nominal,
the braking time is 10% of the set value of P14.4.
Figure 70. DC-Braking Time when Stop Mode = Coasting
fout fout
fn fn
Output Frequency
Motor Speed
Output Frequency
0.1 x fn Motor Speed

DC-Braking ON
DC-Braking ON
t t
t = 1 x P14.4 t = 0.1 x P14.4
RUN RUN
STOP STOP
Par. P7.10 = 1; Stop function = Ramp:

After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced according to the set
deceleration parameters, as fast as possible, to the speed defined with P14.3,
where the DC-braking starts.
The braking time is defined with P14.4. If high inertia exists, it is recommended to
use an external braking resistor for faster deceleration. See Figure 71.
Figure 71. DC-Braking Time when Stop Mode = Ramp
fout
Motor Speed
Output Frequency
DC-Braking
P14.3
t = P14.4
RUN
STOP

P14.5 251 Brake Chopper 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
When the frequency converter is decelerating the motor, the inertia of the motor
and the load is fed into an external brake resistor. This enables the frequency
converter to decelerate the load with a torque equal to that of acceleration (provided
that the correct brake resistor has been selected).
0 = No brake chopper used
1 = Brake chopper in use and tested when running. Can be tested also in READY
state
2 = External brake chopper (no testing)
3 = Used and tested in READY state and when running
4 = Used when running (no testing)
P14.6 266 Flux Brake 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Instead of DC braking, flux braking is a useful form of braking for motors <15 kW.
When braking is needed, the frequency is reduced and the flux in the motor is
increased, which in turn increases the motor’s capability to brake. Unlike DC braking,
the motor speed remains controlled during braking.
The flux braking can be set ON or OFF.
0 = Flux braking OFF
1 = Flux braking ON
Note: Flux braking converts the energy into heat in the motor, and should be used
intermittently to avoid motor damage.
P14.7 519 Flux Brake Current 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines the flux braking current value output when Flux Brake is enabled.
P15.1 535 Fire Mode Function 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter determines whether the fire mode function is determined by a
contact closure or contact opening on the desired digital input (P3.28).
0 = Closing contact initiates fire mode function
1 = Opening contact initiates fire mode function
P15.2 536 FMRefSelFunction 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter sets the reference location for when the firemode is enabled.
0 = Fire Mode Min Frequency (P15.3)
1 = Fire Mode Ref—follows P15.4 and P15.5 with the use of an digital input to select.
2 = Fieldbus Ref—Reference from fieldbus process in
3 = AI1—Analog input 1
4 = AI2—Analog input 2
5 = AI1 + AI2—Analog input 1 added to Analog input 2
6 = PID1 Control—follows the PID control algorithm settings
P15.3 537 Fire Mode Min Frequency 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter sets the minimum output frequency for fire mode.This can be used
as a selection for reference command.
P15.4 565 Fire Mode Freq Ref 1 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter sets the drive operating percentage based off the 0% being Min
Frequency (P1.1) and 100% being Max Frequency (P1.2) for fire mode reference 1.
P15.5 564 Fire Mode Freq Ref 2 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter sets the drive operating percentage based off the 0% being Min
Frequency (P1.1) and 100% being Max Frequency (P1.2) for fire mode reference 2.
P15.6 554 Smoke Purge Frequency 2, 3, 4 RW
Frequency setting for Smoke Purge. Preset Speed used for a digital input selection.
The percentage is based off the 0% being Min Frequency (P1.1) and 100% being
Max Frequency (P1.2).

P16.1 557 Motor Nom Current 2 2, 3, 4 RW
The second motor set nameplate current. Selected based off of a digital input.
P16.2 578 Motor Nom Speed 2 2, 3, 4 RW
The second motor set nameplate RPM. Selected based off of a digital input.
P16.3 579 Motor PF 2 2, 3, 4 RW
The second motor set nameplate power factor. Selected based off of a digital input.
P16.4 580 Motor Nom Voltage 2 2, 3, 4 RW
The second motor set nameplate voltage. Selected based off of a digital input.
P16.5 581 Motor Nom Freq 2 2, 3, 4 RW
The second motor set nameplate frequency. Selected based off of a digital input.
P16.6 1419 Stator Resistor 2 4 RW
The second set of motor stator resistor real values for 2nd motor set.
P16.7 1420 Rotor Resistor 2 4 RW
The second set of motor rotor resistor real values for 2nd motor set.
P16.8 1421 Leak Inductance 2 4 RW
The second set of motor leakage inductance real values for 2nd motor set.
P16.9 1422 Mutual Inductance 2 4 RW
The second set of motor mutual inductance real values for 2nd motor set.
P16.10 1423 Excitation Current 2 4 RW
The second set of motor no-load current real values for 2nd motor set.
P17.1 1418 Bypass Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter identifies whether enter into bypass mode is enabled. Once enabled,
the “Bypass” soft key on keypad will show to start bypass.
P17.2 544 Bypass Start Delay 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter specifies the time delay between when the Bypass Signal is applied
via I/O, Fieldbus or keypad, to when the motor starts. It also specifies the time to
switch back to drive once bypass is removed.
P17.3 542 Auto Bypass 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter specifies whether an automatic switch to bypass will occur based on
Overvoltage Fault condition. It is enabled based off a specific fault condition of Auto
Bypass (P10.5) through Undervoltage Fault Auto Bypass (P10.9) parameters.
0 = Auto Bypass disabled
1 = Auto Bypass enabled
P17.4 543 Auto Bypass Delay 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter specifies the time delay before an automatic switch to bypass, as
determined by Overvoltage Fault Auto Bypass P10.5 through Undervoltage Fault
Auto Bypass P10.9 parameters, will occur.
P17.5 547 Overcurrent Bypass Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter specifies whether an automatic switch to bypass will occur after the
overcurrent fault auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
0 = Auto bypass on overcurrent fault tries exceeded disabled, bypass once fault
happens
1 = Auto bypass on overcurrent fault tries exceeded enabled, bypass after tries
exceed
P17.6 546 IGBT FLT Bypass Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
IGBT fault auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
0 = Auto bypass on IGBT fault tries exceeded disabled
1 = Auto bypass on IGBT fault tries exceeded enabled

P17.7 548 4 mA FLT Bypass Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
loss of reference fault and auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
0 = Auto bypass on loss of reference fault tries exceeded disabled
1 = Auto bypass on loss of reference fault tries exceeded enabled
Note: P1.7.1 (4 mA (Reference) Fault Auto Bypass) must be set to 4 or 5 (Fault).
P17.8 545 Undervoltage Bypass Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
undervoltage fault auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
0 = Auto bypass on undervoltage fault tries exceeded disabled
1 = Auto bypass on undervoltage fault tries exceeded enabled
P17.9 549 Overvoltage Bypass Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
overvoltage fault auto-restart tries have been exceeded.
0 = Auto bypass on overvoltage fault tries exceeded disabled
1 = Auto bypass on overvoltage fault tries exceeded enabled
P18.1.1.1 2218 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the operation mode of Drive 1 when doing the Multi-Pump
mode with multiple drives connected via Modbus together to run individual motors.
0 = Offline—when in single drive mode, slave drive which lost master in multi-drive
or slave drive is in fire mode
1 = Slave Drive—Operates as an auxiliary drive in multi-drive mode
2 = Master Drive—Operates as the regulating drive of the multi-drive mode
P18.1.1.2 2230 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.1.1.3 2242 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.1.1.4 2254 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.1.1.5 2266 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO

P18.1.2.1 2219 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Multi-pump level when
doing the Multi-Pump mode with multiple drives connected via Modbus together to
run individual motors.
0 = Stopped—For master or single drive that is stopped
1 = Sleep—For master or single drive that is asleep
2 = Regulating—For master or single drive which is running
3 = Wait for CMD—For slave drive which is stopped
4 = Following—For slave drive which is running
5 = Unknown—status for disconnected drives showing on the other drives menu
P18.1.2.2 2231 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.1.2.3 2243 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.1.2.4 2255 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.1.2.5 2267 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO

P18.1.3.1 2220 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Network Status when
0 = Disconnected—for disconnected slave drive, single drive or MPFC is disabled
1 = Fault—For drives that suffer fault
2 = Pump Lost—for drives that lose interlock signal
3 = Need Alternation—for drives that run time is over limit
4 = No Error
P18.1.3.2 2232 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
4 = No Error
P18.1.3.3 2244 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
4 = No Error
P18.1.3.4 2256 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
4 = No Error
P18.1.3.5 2268 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO
4 = No Error
P18.2.1.1 2221 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Latest Fault Code when
run individual motors. This will be seen from the Master drive.

P18.2.1.2 2233 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.1.3 2245 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.1.4 2257 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.1.5 2269 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.2.1 2222 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Output Frequency when
P18.2.2.2 2234 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.2.3 2246 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.2.4 2258 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.2.5 2270 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.3.1 2223 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Motor Voltage when doing
the Multi-Pump mode with multiple drives connected via Modbus together to run
individual motors. This will be seen from the Master drive.
P18.2.3.2. 2235 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.3.3 2247 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.3.4 2259 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.3.5 2271 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO

P18.2.4.1 2224 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Motor Current when doing
P18.2.4.2 2236 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.4.3 2248 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.4.4 2260 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.4.5 2272 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.5.1 2225 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Motor Torque when doing
P18.2.5.2 2237 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.5.3 2249 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.5.4 2261 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.5.5 2273 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.6.1 2226 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Motor Power when doing
P18.2.6.2 2238 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.6.3 2250 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.6.4 2262 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO

P18.2.6.5 2274 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.7.1 2227 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Motor Speed when doing
P18.2.7.2 2239 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.7.3 2251 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.7.4 2263 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.7.5 2275 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.8.1 2228 Drive 1 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter gives the status of Drive 1 in terms of the Motor Run Time when
P18.2.8.2 2240 Drive 2 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.8.3 2252 Drive 3 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.8.4 2264 Drive 4 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.2.8.5 2276 Drive 5 2, 3, 4 RO
P18.3.1 2279 Multi-pump Mode 2, 3, 4 RW
Determines the number of drives being used in the Multi-pump configuration.
0 = Disabled—MPFC function disabled
1 = Single Drive—single drive for main motor, contactors used on other motors
2 = Multi Drive—multi-follower sequence with multiple drives.
P18.3.2 2778 Drive ID 2, 3, 4 RW
Determines the address of this drive in the multi-drive line up. This must be a unique
network identifier for communication to occur. Modbus address has to be set
different along with this ID to determine order of operation.

P18.3.3 342 Number of Motors 2, 3, 4 RW
Total number of auxiliary motors/pumps to be used with the Multi-Pump System.
When in single drive mode, this functions as the amount of motors on a single drive.
When in multi drive mode, this functions as the most drives active at one time.
P18.3.4 2284 Regulation Source 2, 3, 4 RW
For drives that have been connected with both start/stop signal and PID feedback
can be set up as “Feedback”, so they will have ability to be master.
0 = Network
P18.3.5 2285 Recovery Method 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter is for the slave when multi-drive system lost master, slave drive can
continue run if it set to be “Automatic”, however slave drive will stop immediately if
it is set to be “Stop”.
0 = Automatic
1 = Stop
P18.3.6 2286 Callback Source 2, 3, 4 RW
Sometimes some information needs to be callback from slave to master and affect
whole system; if slave drive has a callback source as STO, when it suffers STO fault,
master drive will answer this callback and shutdown whole system.
0 = No Action
P18.3.7 2311 Add/Remove Drive Selection 2, 3, 4 RW
In default, MPFC system will add/remove pump according to their drive ID, from
small to large; and the order can also depend on each slave drive’s running time: add
the drive has shortest running time and remove the drive has longest running time
first. Not used in single drive mode.
0 = Drive ID
1 = Run Time
P18.3.8 343 PID Bandwidth 2, 3, 4 RW
Percentage based off the setpoint above and below which defines when the aux
motor will come online or offline.
P18.3.9 2315 Staging Frequency 2, 3, 4 RW
Master drive can only add pump when output frequency is over staging frequency
and feedback is out of bandwidth.
P18.3.10 2316 De-Staging Frequency 2, 3, 4 RW
Master drive can only reduce pump when output frequency is below de-staging
frequency and feedback is out of bandwidth.
P18.3.11 344 Add/Remove Delay 2, 3, 4 RW
With feedback outside the bandwidth and the output frequency is over/below the
staging/de-staging frequency, this time must pass before motors/pumps are added
or removed from the system.
P18.3.12 350 Interlock Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter enables the drive to look at the digital input interlocks to tell which
motor is available for running or if they were brought offline. When in Multi drive
mode only looks at interlock 1 or in single drive control when not including frequency
converter.
P18.3.13 346 Include Freq Converter 2, 3, 4 RW
When enable this tells the drive if the motor/pump connected to frequency converter
is included in the auto change sequence when using auxiliary contacts. Not available
in multi-drive mode.
P18.3.14 345 Auto Change Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
Autochange will rotate the starting order/priority of the motors in the system to get
equal run time on all the motors. Not available in multi-drive mode.

P18.3.15 347 AutoChange Interval 2, 3, 4 RW
Defines how often to rotate starting order of motors/pumps. Not available in
multi-drive mode.
P18.3.16 349 AutoChange Freq Limit 2, 3, 4 RW
An autochange is done when the autochange interval has elapsed and the drive is
running below autochange frequency limit. Not available in multi-drive mode.
P18.3.17 348 AutoChange Motor Limit 2, 3, 4 RW
An auto change is done when the auto change interval has elapsed and the number
of running aux motors is less than auto change motor limit. Not available in
multi-drive mode.
P18.3.18 2280 Run Time Enable 2, 3, 4 RW
The run time counter will start counting only if this parameter is enabled.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
P18.3.19 2281 Run Time Limit 2, 3, 4 RW
If drive run time is over this limit, there will be “Need Alternation” warning.
Limit equals 0 means run time counter disabled.
P18.3.20 2283 Run Time Reset 2, 3, 4 RW
One-time parameter, set to be 1 will clear run time counter.
P18.3.21 483 Damper Start 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter determines the function of damper. Not available in multi-drive
mode.
0 = Start—standard start
1 = Interlocked Start—To use this, a relay output, RO1–RO3, needs to be
programmed for selections 35 “Damper Control,” and a digital input DIN must be
programmed for selection “RunEn/INTLK.” The relay output is used to energize an
element of the driven system, such as a damper, seal water solenoid, or a pre-lube
pump. Upon a return acknowledgement contact closure to the programmed digital
input, the frequency converter will start.
2 = Interlock Time Start—This functions the same as the Interlocked Start, except
that if the return acknowledgement contact is not received within the Interlock
Timeout, a “prevent-up start” fault is displayed in keypad and the start sequence will
need to be restarted.
3 = Delay Start—This start is similar to the Interlocked Start, except that a return
contact is not used. After the “Delay Time” following the relay output closure, the
frequency converter starts.
P18.3.22 484 Damper Time Out 2, 3, 4 RW
The timeout time used for an Interlocked Time Start, after which the start sequence
must be restarted if no acknowledgement contact is received. Not available in
multi-drive mode.
P18.3.23 485 Damper Delay 2, 3, 4 RW
The delay time following a Delay Start, after which the frequency converter will be
started. Not available in multi-drive mode.
P19.1 491 Interval 1 On Time 2, 3, 4 RW
On time for Interval function. It uses 24-hour format. Use to specify a time for a
desired function be enabled.
P19.2 493 Interval 1 Off Time 2, 3, 4 RW
Off time for Interval function. It uses 24-hour format. Use to specify a time for a
desired function be enabled.

P19.3 517 Interval 1 From Day 2, 3, 4 RW
On day of week for Interval function.
0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
P19.4 518 Interval 1 To Day 2, 3, 4 RW
On day of week for Interval function.
0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday
P19.5 519 Interval 1 Channel 2, 3, 4 RW
Select affected time channel to store the interval time.
0 = Not used
1 = Time channel 1
2 = Time channel 2
3 = Time channel 3
See P19.1.
See P19.2.
See P19.3.
See P19.4.
See P19.5.
See P19.1.
See P19.2.
See P19.3.
See P19.4.
See P19.5.
See P19.1.
See P19.2.

See P19.3.
See P19.4.
See P19.5.
See P19.1.
See P19.2.
See P19.3.
See P19.4.
See P19.5.
P19.26 511 Timer 1 Duration 2, 3, 4 RW
The timer will run when activated by DI.
P19.27 532 Timer 1 Channel 2, 3, 4 RW
Select affected time channel.
0 = Not used
1 = Time channel 1
2 = Time channel 2
3 = Time channel 3
See P19.26.
SeeP19.27.
See P19.26.
See P19.27.
P20.1.1 1556 FB Data Output 1 Sel 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects fieldbus process data word to pass over fieldbus.

P20.2.1 586 RS-485 Comm Set 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter defines the communication protocol for RS-485.
0 = Modbus RTU
1 = BACnet MS/TP
2 = SmartWire-DT
P20.2.2 587 Slave Address 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter defines the slave address for RS-485 communication.
P20.2.3 584 Baud Rate 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter defines communication speed for RS-485 communication.
P20.2.4 585 Parity Type 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter defines parity type for RS-485 communication.
P20.2.5 588 Protocol Status 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter shows the protocol status for RS-485 communication.
0 = Initial
1 = Stopped
2 = Operational
3 = Faulted
P20.2.6 589 Slave Busy 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Shows the status of the Slave device on the network.
P20.2.7 590 Parity Error 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Counts the amount of Parity Errors seen on the RS-485 network.
P20.2.8 591 Slave Fault 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Error response given when slave receives message without communication error,
but can't handle it.
P20.2.9 592 Last Fault Response 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Stores the last active fault for viewing over communications.
P20.2.10 593 Comm Timeout Modbus RTU 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the time it waits before a communication fault occurs over Modbus RTU if a
message isn't received.
P20.2.11 594 BACnet Baud Rate 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Communication speed of BACnet.
P20.2.12 595 MAC Address 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the BACnet Address that the drive will be located at on Instance node.
P20.2.13 596 Instance Number 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the BACnet Instance value.
P20.2.14 598 Comm Timeout BACnet 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the time it waits before a communication fault occurs over BACnet.
P20.2.15 599 BACnet Protocol Status 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Shows the status of the BACnet protocol.
P20.2.16 600 BACnet Fault Code 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
BACnet protocol faults.
0 = None
1 = Sole Master

P20.3.1 1500 IP Address Mode 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter defined the IP address configuration mode for EIP/Modbus TCP.
1 = Static IP
P20.3.2 1507 Active IP Address 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
The current used IP address.
P20.3.3 1509 Active Subnet Mask 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
The current used subnet mask.
P20.3.4 1511 Active Default Gateway 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
The current used default gateway.
P20.3.5 1513 MAC Address 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
48 bit hardware address.
P20.3.6 1501 Static IP Address 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The static IP address. This parameter is used for user to configure the IP address,
when P20.3.1 is set to be 1.
P20.3.7 1503 Static Subnet Mask 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The static IP address. This parameter is used for user to configure the subnet mask,
when P20.3.1 is set to be 1.
P20.3.8 1505 Static Default Gateway 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The static IP address. This parameter is used for user to configure the default
gateway, when P20.3.1 is set to be 1.
P20.3.9 608 EtherNet/IP Protocol Status 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Indicates if Ethernet Protocol is active or not.
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
P20.3.10 609 Connection Limit 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Maximum number of connections allowed to the frequency converter.
P20.3.11 610 Modbus TCP Unit ID 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Unit identifier unit value for Modbus TCP.
P20.3.12 611 Comm Timeout 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Selects the time it waits before a communication fault occurs over Ethernet.
0 = Stopped
1 = Operational
2 = Faulted
P20.3.14 613 Slave Busy 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Value indicates frequency converter is communicating.
P20.3.15 614 Parity Error 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
This parameter checks the input characters’ parity error.
P20.3.16 615 Slave Failure 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Indicates the frequency converter is unable to process message.
P20.3.17 616 Last Fault Resp 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Shows the last active fault that occurred.
Smartwire protocol status.

P20.4.2 2141 SmartWire Baud Rate 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
SmartWire protocol bus speed.
0–125 KBaud
1–250 KBaud
P21.1.1 340 Language 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter offers the ability to control the frequency converter through the
keypad in the language of your choice.
P21.1.2 142 Application 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter sets the active application if multiple applications have been loaded.
P21.1.3 619 Parameter Sets 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter allows you to reload the factory default parameter values, and to
store and load two customized parameter sets.
0 = No
1 = Load Factory Default parameters
2 = Store parameter set #1
3 = Load parameter set #1
4 = Store parameter set #2
5 = Load parameter set #2
P21.1.4 620 Up to Keypad 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This function uploads all existing parameter groups to the keypad.
0 = No
1 = Yes (All parameters)
P21.1.5 621 Down From Keypad 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This function downloads one or all parameter groups from the keypad to the drive.
0 = No
1 = Yes (All parameters)
P21.1.6 623 Param Comparison 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
With the Parameter Comparison function, you can compare the actual parameter
values to the values of your customized parameter sets and those loaded to the
control keypad.
The actual parameter values are first compared to those of the customized
parameter Set1. If no differences are detected, a “0” is displayed on the lowermost
line of the keypad.
If any of the parameter values differ from those of the Set1 parameters, the number
of the deviations is displayed together.
By pressing the right arrow button once again you will see both the actual value and
the value it was compared to. In this display, the value on the Description line (in the
middle) is the default value, and the one on the value line (lowermost line) is the
edited value. You can also edit the actual value by pushing the Right Arrow button.
Actual values can also be compared to Set2, Factory Settings and Keypad Set
values.
P21.1.7 624 Password 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The application selection can be protected against unauthorized changes with the
Password function. When the password function is enabled, the user will be
prompted to enter a password before application changes, parameter value
changes, or password changes.
By default, the password function is not in use. If you want to activate the
password, change the value of this parameter to any number between 1 and 9999.
To deactivate the password, reset the parameter value to 0.

P21.1.8 625 Parameter Lock 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This function allows the user to prohibit changes to the parameters. If the parameter
lock is activated the text *locked* will appear on the display if you try to edit a
parameter value.
Note: This function does not prevent unauthorized editing of parameter values.
P21.1.9 627 Multimonitor Set 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The keypad display where can display three actual monitored values at the same
time. This parameter determines if the operator is allowed to replace the values
monitored with other values.
P21.1.10 628 Default Page 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter sets the view to which the display automatically moves as the
Timeout Time expires or when the keypad power is switched on.
If the Default Page value is 0, the function is not activated, i.e., the last displayed
page remains on the keypad display.
P21.1.11 629 Timeout Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
The Timeout Time setting defines the time after which the keypad display returns to
the Default Page.
Note: If the Default Page value is 0 the Timeout Time setting has no effect.
P21.1.12 630 Contrast Adjust 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
If the display is not clear, you can adjust the keypad contrast with this parameter.
P21.1.13 631 Backlight Time 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter determines how long the backlight stays on before going out.
P21.1.14 632 Fan Control 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This function allows you to control the PowerXL DG1’s cooling fan. You can set the
fan to run:
1 = Continuous fan runs continuously
2 = Temperature—based on the temperature of the unit. The fan is switched on
automatically when the heat sink temperature reaches 60°C. The fan receives a
stop command when the heat sink temperature falls to 55°C. The fan runs for
about a minute after receiving the stop command or switching on the power, as
well as after changing the value from “Continuous” to “Temperature”
3 = First Start after power up, the fan is stopped until the run command is given and
then fan runs continuously. This is mainly made for common DC-bus systems to
prevent cooling fans to load charging resistors on power up moment
4 = Calc Temp starting of cooling fan is based on calculated IGBT temperature.
When IGBT temp = 40°C, fan starts and when temp falls down to 30°C, fan
stops
Note: The fan runs continuously, regardless of this setting, when the frequency
converter is in RUN state.
P21.1.15 633 HMI ACK Timeout 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This function allows the user to change the timeout of the HMI acknowledgement
time.
Example:
l Transfer delay between the frequency converter and the PC = 600 ms
l The value of HMI Acknowledge Timeout is set to 1200 ms (2 x 600, sending
l delay + receiving delay)
l The corresponding setting shall be entered in the [Misc]-part of the file
l NCDrive.ini:
l Retries = 5
l AckTimeOut = 1200
l TimeOut = 6000
It must also be considered that intervals shorter than the HMI Acknowledge
Timeout time cannot be used in frequency converter drive monitoring.

P21.1.16 634 HMI Retry Num 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
With this parameter you can set the number of times the drive will try to receive
acknowledgement when it has not been received within the acknowledgement time
(HMI Acknowledge Timeout) or if the received acknowledgement is faulty.
P21.2.1 640 Keypad Software Version 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
P21.2.2 642 Motor Control Software Version 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
P21.2.3 644 Application Software Version 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
P21.3.1 646 Brake Chopper Stat 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
P21.3.2 647 Brake Resistor 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
P21.3.3 648 Serial Number 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
The Hardware information.
P21.4.1 566 Real Time Clock 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
This parameter shows the real time clock, user can also edit it to adjust time.
P21.4.2 582 Daylight Saving 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Daylight saving rule.
0 = Off
1 = EU
2 = US
P21.4.3 601 Total MWh Count 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Megawatt hours total operation time counter.
P21.4.4 603 Total Power Day Count 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Number of days the GMAX has been supplied with power.
P21.4.5 606 Total Power Hr Count 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Number of hours the GMAX has been supplied with power.
P21.4.6 604 Trip MWh Count 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Megawatts hours since last reset.
P21.4.7 635 Clear Trip MWh Count 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Resets megawatts hours counter and clears Energy Meter in the Menu (P21.4.7).
P21.4.8 636 Trip Power Day Count 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Number of days since the last reset.
P21.4.9 637 Trip Power Hr Count 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Number of hours the HVX9000 has been running a motor since the last reset.
P21.4.10 639 Clear Trip Power Count 1, 2, 3, 4 RW
Resets the day and hour motor or drive running counter and resets the Motor Run
Time in the Menu (P21.4.9 and P21.4.10).
M1 1 Output Frequency 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Drive output frequency going to the motor. This value should match reference
frequency when in frequency control mode.
M2 24 Frequency Reference 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Drive frequency reference value. Motor output frequency should match this value in
frequency control mode.
M3 2 Motor Speed 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Motor speed is calculated based on the V/Hz curve that was set up when motor
parameters were entered.
M4 3 Motor Current 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Measured output motor current.
M5 4 Motor Torque 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Percent calculated motor torque based on the current draw of the motor and its
nameplate values.

M6 5 Motor Power 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Percent calculated motor power based on the current and voltage draw of the motor
and its nameplate values.
M7 6 Motor Voltage 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Measured output AC motor voltage.
M8 7 DC Link Voltage 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Measured DC bus voltage.
M9 8 Unit Temperature 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Measured drive heat sink temperature in °C.
M10 9 Motor Temperature 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Calculated motor temperature value in percentage. Value is based on motor
nameplate data and the motor status information noted on power up.
M11 15 Torque Reference 4 RO
Torque reference percentage used when in torque control mode.
M12 10 Analog Input 1 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Analog input 1 measured value. Can be a current or voltage input signal.
M13 11 Analog Input 2 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Analog input 2 measured value. Can be a current or voltage input signal.
M14 25 Analog Output 1 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Analog output 1 measured value supplied from the drive. Can be a current or voltage
output signal.
M15 575 Analog Output 2 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Analog output 2 measured value supplied from the drive. Can be a current or voltage
output signal.
M16 12 DI1, DI2, DI3 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Digital input status.
M17 13 DI4, DI5, DI6 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
M18 576 DI7, DI8 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
M19 14 DO1 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Digital output status.
M20 557 RO1, RO2, RO3 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Relay output status.
M21 558 TC1, TC2, TC3 2, 3, 4 RO
Timer channel status.
M22 559 Interval 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Time interval 1 status.
M23 560 Interval 2 2, 3, 4 RO
M24 561 Interval 3 2, 3, 4 RO
M25 562 Interval 4 2, 3, 4 RO
M26 563 Interval 5 2, 3, 4 RO

M27 569 Timer 1 2, 3, 4 RO
Timer 1 value in seconds.
M28 571 Timer 2 2, 3, 4 RO
M29 573 Timer 3 2, 3, 4 RO
M30 16 PID1 Set Point 2, 3, 4 RO
PID1 reference value level.
M31 18 PID1 Feedback 2, 3, 4 RO
PID1 actual value feedback level.
M32 20 PID1 Error Value 2, 3, 4 RO
PID1 difference between set point and feedback value levels.
M33 22 PID1 Output 2, 3, 4 RO
PID1 output percentage to the motor.
M34 23 PID1 Status 2, 3, 4 RO
PID1 status indication. Indicates if drive is stopped, running in PID mode, or in
PID sleep mode.
M35 32 PID2 Set Point 3, 4 RO
PID2 reference value level.
M36 34 PID2 Feedback 3, 4 RO
PID2 actual value feedback level.
M37 36 PID2 Error Value 3, 4 RO
PID2 difference between set point and feedback value levels.
M38 38 PID2 Output 3, 4 RO
PID2 output percentage to the motor.
M39 39 PID2 Status 3, 4 RO
PID2 status indication. Indicates if drive is stopped, running in PID mode, or in
PID sleep mode.
M40 26 Running Motors 2, 3, 4 RO
Number of auxiliary motors currently running.
M41 27 PT100 Temperature 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
PT100 thermistor temperature value in °C.
M42 28 Last Active Fault 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Last active fault value. See fault codes for the value shown here.
M43 583 RTC Battery Status 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Real-time clock battery status.
M44 1686 Instance Motor Power 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Measured Instantaneous motor power draw in kW.
M45 2119 Energy Savings 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Displayed energy value based off of format chosen.
M46 30 Multi-Monitoring 1, 2, 3, 4 RO
Displays 3 monitoring values in a single screen. The values are selectable via the
keypad menu.
Appendix B—Faults and Warning Codes

Under this menu, you can find Active faults, History faults and Fault codes.
Table 162. Active Faults

Menu Function Note
Active Faults When a fault/faults appear(s), the display with the name and fault time of The fault remains active until it is cleared with the Reset button
the fault will be pop. Press DETAIL to see the fault data. (push for 2s) or with a reset signal from the I/O terminal or Fieldbus.
The Active Faults submenu shows the list of faults. Select the fault and The memory of active faults can store the maximum of 10 faults in
push DETAIL to see the fault data. the order of appearance.
Table 163. History Faults

Menu Function Note
History Faults 10 latest faults are stored in the Fault history, Select the fault and push The history fault will be stored until it is cleared with the OK button
DETAIL to see the fault data. (push for 5s).
The memory of active faults can store the maximum of 10 faults in
the order of appearance.
Fault Codes and Descriptions

Configurable 1 = The fault type of this fault is configurable, fault type can be configured as
0 = No Action; 1 = Warning; 2 = Fault; 3= Fault, Coast
Fault Default
Code Fault Name Fault Type Fault Type Possible Cause Remedy
1 Over Current Fault AC drive has detected too high a current • Check loading
(>4*IH) in the motor cable: • Check motor
• Sudden heavy load increase • Check cables and connections
• Short circuit in motor cables • Make identification run
• Unsuitable motor • Check ramp times
2 Over Voltage Fault The DC-link voltage has exceeded the limits • Make deceleration time longer
defined: • Use brake chopper or brake resistor
• Too short of a deceleration time (available as options)
• Brake chopper is disabled • Activate overvoltage controller
• High overvoltage spikes in supply • Check input voltage
• Start/Stop sequence too fast
3 Earth Fault Configurable (1) Fault Current measurement has detected that the Check motor cables and motor
sum of motor phase current is not zero:
• Insulation failure in cables or motor
5 Charging Switch Fault The charging switch is open, when the START • Reset the fault and restart
command has been given: • Should the fault re-occur, contact the
• Faulty operation distributor near to you
• Component failure
6 Emergency Stop Fault • STO terminal open in control board • Closed STO terminal
• Emergency signal from DI is activated • Remove signal from DI
7 Saturation Trip Fault • Short circuit in motor cables Check cables and connections
• IGBT module is damaged Reset the fault and restart
Verify that EMC screw is installed
Should the fault re-occur, contact the distributor
near to you
Fault Default
9 UnderVoltage Configurable (1) Fault DC link voltage is under the voltage limits In case of temporary supply voltage break, reset
defined: the fault and restart the AC drive. Check the
• Most probable cause: Too low of a supply supply voltage. If it is adequate, an internal
voltage failure has occurred. Contact the distributor
• AC drive internal fault near you
• Defective input fuse
• External charge switch not closed
Note: This fault is activated only if the drive is
in Run state.
10 Input Phase Spv Configurable (1) Fault • Input line phase is missing Check supply voltage, fuses and cable
11 Output Phase Spv Configurable (1) Fault Current measurement has detected that there Check motor cable and motor
is no current in one motor phase
12 BrakeChopperSpv Fault • No brake resistor installed Check brake resistor and cabling. If these are
• Brake resistor is broken OK, the brake chopper is faulty. Contact the
• Brake chopper failure distributor near you.
13 Drive UnderTemp Configurable (1) Warning Too low temperature measured in power
Unit’s heat sink or board. Heat sink
temperature is under –10 °C
14 Drive OverTemp Fault Too high temperature measured in power unit • Check the correct amount and flow of cooling
heat sink or board. air
• Heat sink temperature is over 90 °C • Check the heat sink for dust
• Check the ambient temperature
• Make sure that the switching frequency is
not too high in relation to ambient
temperature and motor load
15 Motor Stalled Configurable (1) No Action • Motor is stalled Check motor and load
16 Motor OverTemp Configurable (1) No Action • Motor is too hot (based on either the drive’s Decrease motor load. If no motor overload
estimate or on temperature feedback) exists, check the temperature model parameters
17 Motor UnderLoad Configurable (1) No Action Condition defined by parameter Check load
P1.9.15~P1.9.17 have been valid longer than
the time defined by P1.9.18
18 IP Address Conflict Configurable (1) Warning IP setting issue. Check settings for IP address, verify no
duplicates are on the network.
19 Power board Fault Power board eeprom fault, memory lost in Cycle power to drive. Try updating software, if
EEPROM Fault eeprom. issue continues contact Distributor near you.
20 FRAM Fault Fault FRAM data error in FRAM memory. Cycle power to drive. Try updating software, if
issue continues contact a Distributor near you.
21 Serial Flash Fault warning Serial flash error, serial flash memory failed. Cycle power to drive. Try updating software, if
issue continues contact a Distributor near you.
25 MCU WatchDog Fault Watchdog register overflows in MCU Cycle power to drive. Try updating software, if
Fault issue continues contact a Distributor near you.
26 Start-up Prevent Fault The time when Interlock signal activates is over Stop drive and resend start command.
setting time.
29 Thermistor Fault Configurable (1) Fault Option board or control board thermistor Thermistor open or short, over temperature
resistor larger than 4.7 k
32 Fan Cooling Fault Fan is damaged or stalled. Check fan and fan connected wires. Verify
24 Vdc is supplied to fan.
36 Compatibility Fault Fault The control board doesn’t match with the Cycle power to drive. Try updating software. If
power board. issue continues, contact a Distributor near you.
37 Device Change Warning Power board or option card change. Alarm will reset
38 Device Added Warning Power board or option board added. Device is ready for use
Old parameter settings will be used
Fault Default
39 Device Removed Fault Option board removed from slot, or power Device will no longer be available in drive.
board removed from control board.
40 Device Unknown Fault Unknown device connected (power board/ Check eeprom connection.
option board) Check board connection on slot A/B
Cycle power to drive.
41 IGBT Temperature Fault IGBT temperature is too high. • Check output loading
• Check motor size
• Decrease switching frequency
50 AIN<4mA(4to20mA) Configurable (1) No Action Loss of analog input signal (dropped below Verify analog input current reference value on
4 mA) either AI1 or AI2. Check cabling.
51 External Fault Configurable (1) Fault Digital input is activated for external fault Check digital input settings and verify input
input. level. There could be an external device causing
fault.
52 Keypad Configurable (1) Fault Connection lost between keypad and drive Check keypad connection and possible keypad
Communication control section when control place and cable.
Fault reference are set to Keypad.
54 OPT Card Fault Configurable (1) Fault Defective option card or option card slot Check option card and option card slot
connections.
Check Board Status on Keypad for exact cause
of fault.
Contact distributor near you.
55 Real time clock Configurable (1) Warning • Communication between MCU and RTC chip Check the RTC chip, power cycle to drive. If issue
fault isn’t normal continues contact distributor near you.
• The power of RTC chip isn’t normal
• The real time isn’t normal
56 PT100 Fault Configurable (1) Fault Temperature is beyond the limit of sensing Pt100 short, open or over temperature, check
capacity of PT100 PT100 temperature probe.
57 Motor ID fault Fault The Motor parameters Identification run was Check motor size
not completed successfully Verify the input and output wiring is connected
properly.
58 Current Measure Fault Current measurement is out of range Restart the drive again. Should the fault
Fault re-occur, contact the distributor near to you
59 Possible power Fault Power wiring may connected to output of drive Verify power input wiring is connected to L1, L2
wiring error or not properly torqued and L3 terminals and they are properly torqued.
detected
60 Control Board Fault Control board is over +85 °C or under –30 °C Check NTC resistor
OverTemp Check control board temperature
61 Internal-ctrl Supply Fault +24V port voltage is over 27 V or under 17 V Check voltage range of +24 V on terminals 12 to
13. If voltage is out of range, contact distributor
near you.
62 Too Many Speed Fault Speed searching failed when performing flying Check motor parameters’ setting and motor
Search Restarts start. connections.
63 Current Unbalance Fault Output current is unbalanced. Check motor wiring and voltage output of drive.
If issue continues, contact distributor near you.
64 Replace Battery Configurable (1) Warning RTC battery voltage is too low. Check the RTC battery voltage. Contact
distributor near you for replacement battery.
65 Replace Fan Configurable (1) Warning Fan life is less than 2 months Check the fan. Clean out any contamination.
Contact distributor near you for replacement fan.
66 Safety Torque Off Fault STO was triggered and STO input is open. Reset STO Trigger and verify wiring. Reset fault
after input is enabled.
67 Current limit control Warning The output current has reached the current limit Check the load
value Set the acceleration time longer
Fault Default
68 Over voltage control Warning The DC link voltage has reached its voltage Check the input voltage
limit value Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer
69 System Fault Fault Thermistor SPI communication error. Check thermistor chip.
70 System Fault Fault MCU sent wrong parameters to DSP. Restart the drive. Should the fault re-occur,
contact the distributor near to you.
71 System Fault Fault MCU and DSP communication error. Restart the drive. Should the fault re-occur,
contact the distributor near to you.
72 Power Board Fault Power board eeprom fault, memory lost in Cycle power to drive. Try updating software to
EEPROM Fault eeprom when drive is initialized. latest revision. If issue continues, contact
distributor near you.
73 FRAM Fault Fault FRAM chip is broken. Contact distributor near you.
74 FRAM Fault Fault CRC check fault when accessing fram data. Reset drive to factory defaults. If issue
continues, contact distributor near you.
75 Power Board Fault eeprom chip or I2c circuit is broken. Contact distributor near you.
EEPROM Fault
76 Power Board Fault CRC check fault when accessing eeprom data. Reset drive to factory defaults. If issue
EEPROM Fault continues, contact distributor near you.
77 Serial Flash Fault warning External serial flash chip is broken. Contact distributor near you.
82 BypassOverLoad Fault Over load fault when drive is in bypass mode Check motor connections
83 FieldBus Fault Configurable (1) Fault Loss of communication with Modbus RTU when Check RS485 communication wiring. Verify drive
the control place and reference signal are set to parameters are set correctly. Check master
Fieldbus and the Fieldbus signal is lost or there programming to verify proper addressing.
is an issue with communication settings.
84 FieldBus Fault Configurable (1) Fault Loss of communication with Modbus TCP when Check Ethernet communication wiring. Verify
the control place and reference signal are set to drive parameters are set correctly. Check master
Fieldbus and the Fieldbus signal is lost or there programming to verify proper addressing.
is an issue with communication settings.
85 FieldBus Fault Configurable (1) Fault Loss of communication with BACnet when the Check RS485 communication wiring. Verify drive
control place and reference signal are set to parameters are set correctly. Check BACnet
Fieldbus and the Fieldbus signal is lost or there master configuration programming to verify
is an issue with communication settings. proper addressing.
86 FieldBus Fault Configurable (1) Fault Loss of communication with EtherNet/IP when Check Ethernet communication wiring. Verify
the control place and reference signal are set to drive parameters are set correctly. Check EIP
Fieldbus and the Fieldbus signal is lost or there master configuration programming to verify
is an issue with communication settings. proper addressing.
87 FieldBus Fault Configurable (1) Fault Loss of communication with PROFIBUS master Check PROFIBUS/CANOpen/DeviceNet
in Slot A when the control place and reference communication wiring. Verify drive parameters
signal are set to Fieldbus and the Fieldbus are set correctly. Check PROFIBUS/CANOpen/
signal is lost or there is an issue with DeviceNet master configuration programming
communication settings. to verify proper addressing.
88 FieldBus Fault Configurable (1) Fault Loss of communication with PROFIBUS master Check PROFIBUS/CANOpen/DeviceNet
in Slot B when the control place and reference communication wiring. Verify drive parameters
signal are set to Fieldbus and the Fieldbus are set correctly. Check PROFIBUS/CANOpen/
signal is lost or there is an issue with DeviceNet master configuration programming
communication settings. to verify proper addressing.
89 Under Voltage Fault The DC link voltage has reached the drive's Check the input voltage.
under voltage stop limit value.
Fault Default
90 Drive UnderTemp Warning/Fault • Cold weather mode is not enabled, and unit If unit temp is between –20 °C and –10 °C, start
temperature is less than –10 °C. the motor in cold weather mode.
• Cold weather mode is enabled, Under Temp If unit temp is less than –20 °C, warm the unit to
Fault Override is not set, and unit above –20 °C for proper operation using cold
temperature is less than –30 °C. weather mode. If is it still less than –20 °C when
• Cold weather mode is enabled, Under Temp cold weather mode time out, try a higher output
Fault Override is not set, and unit voltage in cold weather mode.
temperature is between –20 °C and –30 °C.
The temp is less than –20 °C when cold
weather start time out.
91 Option Card Fault Fault External supply on the DeviceNet Check voltage and wiring of power supply of
communication connector is not present. the DeviceNet communication.
92 External Fault 2 Configurable (1) Fault Digital input is activated for external fault Check digital input settings and verify input
input. level. There could be an external device
causing fault.
93 External Fault 3 Configurable (1) Fault Digital input is activated for external fault Check digital input settings and verify input
input. level. There could be an external device
causing fault.
Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efficient and safe
power is available when it’s needed most. With unparalleled
knowledge of electrical power management across industries,
experts at Eaton deliver customized, integrated solutions to
solve our customers’ most critical challenges.
Our focus is on delivering the right solution for the application.

But, decision makers demand more than just innovative products.
They turn to Eaton for an unwavering commitment to personal
support that makes customer success a top priority. For more
information, visit www.eaton.com/electrical.
Eaton
1000 Eaton Boulevard
Cleveland, OH 44122
United States
Eaton.com
© 2015 Eaton
All Rights Reserved Eaton is a registered trademark.
Printed in USA
Publication No. MN040004EN / Z16120 All other trademarks are property
April 2015 of their respective owners.

PowerXL DG1 Application Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PowerXL DG1 Application Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PowerXL DG1 Application Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PowerXL DG1 Series VFD

Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Liability

PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com i

EatonCare Customer Support Center

Drives Technical Resource Center

For Customers in Europe, Contact

ii PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

CHAPTER 1—POWERXL DG1 SERIES OVERVIEW

CHAPTER 2—KEYPAD OVERVIEW

CHAPTER 3—MENU OVERVIEW

CHAPTER 5—STANDARD APPLICATION

CHAPTER 6—MULTI-PUMP AND FAN CONTROL APPLICATION

CHAPTER 7—MULTI-PID APPLICATION

Table of Contents, continued

APPENDIX A—DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

APPENDIX B—FAULTS AND WARNING CODES

iv PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com v

List of Figures, continued

vi PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

List of Tables, continued

List of Tables, continued

PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com ix

List of Tables, continued

x PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

Warning! ● Measures should be taken to ensure the proper restart of

PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com xi

Definitions and Symbols Warnings and Cautions

Important Safety Information Important Warnings

DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com xv

● Pour réduire les risques d’accidents et de dommages Haute tension dangereuse

xvi DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

Avertissements et mises en garde

DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com xvii

AVERTISSEMENT MISE EN GARDE

Avant de procéder à l'entretien de l'entraînement : MISE EN GARDE

Le dissipateur de chaleur et/ou le boîtier externe peuvent

MISE EN GARDE MISE EN GARDE

xviii DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

● Ne pas tenter d'installer ou de retirer les vis des VOM et

Sélectionner du contacteur du moteur en fonction du courant

DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com xix

MISE EN GARDE MISE EN GARDE

xx DG1 Series VFD MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

Chapter 1—PowerXL DG1 Series Overview

Receiving and Inspection

PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com 1

Date Code: 20131118

Carton Labels (U.S. and Europe)

2 PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

Catalog Number System

Series Phase Reference Internal Brake Chopper Enclosure (IP Rating)

PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com 3

Power Ratings and Product Selection

Table 3. Type 12/IP54

4 PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com

DG1 Series Drives—380–500 Volt

Table 5. Type 12/IP54

PowerXL DG1 Series Adjustable Frequency Drives MN040004EN—April 2015 www.eaton.com 5

DG1 Series Drives—600 Volt 1